Compounds having beta2 adrenergic receptor agonist and muscarinic receptor antagonist activity

ABSTRACT

This invention provides compounds of formula I: 
     
       
         
         
             
             
         
       
         
         
           
             wherein R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , R 6 , R 7 , R 8a , R 8b , W, a, b, c and m are as defined in the specification, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate or stereoisomer thereof. The compounds of this invention possess both β 2  adrenergic receptor agonist and muscarinic receptor antagonist activity. Accordingly, such compounds are expected to be useful as therapeutic agents for treating pulmonary disorders, such as chronic obstructive pulmonary disease and asthma.

CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS

This application claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional Application No. 60/601,779, filed on Aug. 16, 2004; the entire disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.

BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION

1. Field of the Invention

The present invention relates to novel compounds having β₂ adrenergic receptor agonist and muscarinic receptor antagonist activity. This invention also relates to pharmaceutical compositions comprising such compounds, processes and intermediates for preparing such compounds and methods of using such compounds to treat pulmonary disorders.

2. State of the Art

Pulmonary disorders, such as asthma and chronic obstructive pulmonary disease (COPD), are commonly treated with bronchodilators. One class of bronchodilator in widespread use consists of β₂ adrenergic receptor (adrenoceptor) agonists, such as albuterol, formoterol and salmeterol. These compounds are generally administered by inhalation. Another class of bronchodilator consists of muscarinic receptor antagonists (anticholinergic compounds), such as ipratropium and tiotropium. These compounds are also typically administered by inhalation.

Pharmaceutical compositions containing both a β₂ adrenergic receptor agonist and a muscarinic receptor antagonist are also known in the art for use in treating pulmonary disorders. For example, U.S. Pat. No. 6,433,027 discloses medicament compositions containing a muscarinic receptor antagonist, such as tiotropium bromide, and a β₂ adrenergic receptor agonist, such as formoterol fumarate.

Although compounds having either β₂ adrenergic receptor agonist or muscarinic receptor antagonist activity are known, no compound having both β₂ adrenergic receptor agonist and muscarinic receptor antagonist activity has been previously disclosed. Compounds possessing both β₂ adrenergic receptor agonist and muscarinic receptor antagonist activity are highly desirable since such bifunctional compounds would provide bronchodilation through two independent modes of action while having single molecule pharmacokinetics. Moreover, a single bifunctional compound would be simpler to formulate for therapeutic uses compared to two separate compounds and would be easier to co-formulate with other therapeutic agents to create triple therapy combinations.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION

The present invention provides novel compounds that have been found to possess both β₂ adrenergic receptor agonist and muscarinic receptor antagonist activity. Such compounds are expected to be useful as therapeutic agents for treating pulmonary disorders.

Accordingly, in one of its composition aspects, the present invention provides a compound of formula I:

wherein

W represents O or NW^(a); where W^(a) is hydrogen or (1-4C)alkyl;

R¹ is (2-9C)heteroaryl containing from 1 to 4 heteroatoms independently selected from oxygen, nitrogen and sulfur or (3-7C)cycloalkyl; wherein the heteroaryl or cycloalkyl group is unsubstituted or substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents independently selected from (1-4C)alkyl, (2-4C)alkenyl, (2-4C)alkynyl, (3-6C)cycloalkyl, (6-10C)aryl, (2-9C)heteroaryl, (3-5C)heterocyclic, cyano, halo, —OR^(1a), —C(O)OR^(1b), —SR^(1c), —S(O)R^(1d), —S(O)₂R^(1e), —NR^(1f)R^(1g), —C(O)R^(1h), —NR^(1i)C(O)OR^(1j), —OC(O)NR^(1k)R^(1l), —NR^(1m)C(O)R^(1n), —C(O)NR^(1o)R^(1p) and —NHS(O)₂R^(1q); where each of R^(1a), R^(1b), R^(1c), R^(1d), R^(1e), R^(1f), R^(1g), R^(1h), R^(1i), R^(1j), R^(1k), R^(1l), R^(1m), R^(1n), R^(1o), R^(1p) and R^(1q) is independently selected from hydrogen, (1-4C)alkyl or phenyl-(1-4C)alkyl; and where each (3-6C)cycloalkyl, (6-10C)aryl, (2-9C)heteroaryl and (3-5C)heterocyclic group is unsubstituted or substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents selected from (1-4C)alkyl, halo and —OR^(1a); and where each alkyl group present in R¹ is unsubstituted or substituted with from 1 to 3 fluoro substituents;

each R² is independently selected from (1-4C)alkyl, (2-4C)alkenyl, (2-4C)alkynyl, (3-6C)cycloalkyl, cyano, halo, —OR^(2a), —C(O)OR^(2b), —SR^(2c), —S(O)R^(2d), —S(O)₂R^(2e) and NR^(2f)R^(2g); where each of R^(2a), R^(2b), R^(2c), R^(2d), R^(2e), R^(2f) and R^(2g) is independently selected from hydrogen, (1-4C)alkyl or phenyl-(1-4C)alkyl; and where each alkyl group present in R² is unsubstituted or substituted with from 1 to 3 fluoro substituents;

each R³ is independently selected from (1-4C)alkyl, (2-4C)alkenyl, (2-4C)alkynyl, (3-6C)cycloalkyl, cyano, halo, —OR^(3a), —C(O)OR^(3b), —SR^(3c), —S(O)R^(3d), —S(O)₂R^(3e) and —NR^(3f)R^(3g); or two R³ groups are joined to form (1-3C)alkylene, (2-3C)alkenylene or oxiran-2,3-diyl; where each of R^(3a), R^(3b), R^(3c), R^(3d), R^(3e), R^(3f) and R^(3g) is independently selected from hydrogen, (1-4C)alkyl or phenyl-(1-4C)alkyl;

R⁴ represents a divalent hydrocarbon group containing from 4 to 28 carbon atoms and optionally containing from 1 to 10 heteroatoms selected independently from halo, oxygen, nitrogen and sulfur, provided that the number of contiguous atoms in the shortest chain between the two nitrogen atoms to which R⁴ is attached is in the range of from 4 to 16;

R⁵ represents hydrogen or (1-4C)alkyl;

R⁶ is —N(R^(6a))C(O)R^(6b) or —CR^(6c)R^(6d)R^(6e) and R⁷ is hydrogen; or R⁶ and R⁷ together form —N(R^(7a))C(O)C(R^(7b))═C(R^(7c))—, —C(R^(7d))═C(R^(7e))C(O)N(R^(7f))—, —N(R^(7g))C(O)CR^(7h)R^(7i)—CR^(7j)CR^(7k)— or —CR^(7l)R^(7m)—CR^(7n)R^(7o)C(O)—N(R^(7p))—; where each of R^(6a), R^(6b), R^(6c), R^(6d) and R^(6e) is independently selected from hydrogen and (1-4C)alkyl; and each of R^(7a), R^(7b), R^(7c), R^(7d), R^(7e), R^(7f), R^(7g), R^(7h), R^(7i), R^(7j), R^(7k), R^(7l), R^(7m), R^(7n), R^(7o) and R^(7p) is independently selected from hydrogen and (1-4C)alkyl;

each R^(8a) and R^(8b) is independently selected from hydrogen, (1-4C)alkyl, hydroxy and fluoro, or R^(8a) and R^(8b) together with the atoms to which they are attached form a (3-6C)cycloalkyl ring or a (2-5C)heterocyclic ring containing 1 or 2 heteroatoms independently selected from oxygen, nitrogen and sulfur;

a is 0 or an integer of from 1 to 3;

b is 0 or an integer of from 1 to 5;

c is 0 or an integer of from 1 to 4;

m is 0 or an integer of from 1 to 3;

or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate or stereoisomer thereof.

In a particular aspect, this invention provides a compound of formula II:

wherein R¹, R², R⁴, W and a are as defined herein (including any specific or preferred embodiments); or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate or stereoisomer thereof.

In another particular aspect, this invention provides a compound of formula III:

wherein R¹, R², R⁴, W and a are as defined herein (including any specific or preferred embodiments); or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate or stereoisomer thereof.

In yet another particular aspect, this invention provides a compound of formula IV:

wherein R¹, R², R⁴, W and a are as defined herein (including any specific or preferred embodiments); or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate or stereoisomer thereof.

In another particular aspect, this invention provides a compound of formula V:

wherein R², R³, R⁴, R⁵, R⁶, R⁷, R^(8a), R^(8b) W, a, b, c and m are as defined herein (including any specific or preferred embodiments); and each R⁹ is independently selected from (1-4C)alkyl, (2-4C)alkenyl, (2-4C)alkynyl, (3-6C)cycloalkyl, cyano, halo, —OR^(9a), —C(O)OR^(9b), —SR^(9c), —S(O)R^(9d), —S(O)₂R^(9e) and —NR^(9f)R^(9g); wherein R^(9a), R^(9b), R^(9c), R^(9d), R^(9e), R^(9f) and R^(9g) are independently selected from hydrogen, (1-4C)alkyl or phenyl-(1-4C)alkyl; and n is 0, 1, 2 or 3; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate or stereoisomer thereof.

In another particular aspect, this invention provides a compound of formula VI:

wherein R², R³, R⁴R⁵, R⁶, R⁷, R^(8a), R^(8b), W, a, b, c and m are as defined herein (including any specific or preferred embodiments); and each R¹⁰ is independently selected from (1-4C)alkyl, (2-4C)alkenyl, (2-4C)alkynyl, (3-6C)cycloalkyl, cyano, halo, —OR^(10a), —C(O)OR^(10b), —SR^(10c), —S(O)R^(10d), —S(O)₂R^(10e) and —NR^(10f)R^(10g); wherein R^(10a), R^(10b), R^(10c), R^(10d), R^(10c), R^(10f) and R^(10g) are independently selected from hydrogen, (1-4C)alkyl or phenyl-(1-4C)alkyl; and o is 0, 1, 2 or 3; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate or stereoisomer thereof.

In another particular aspect, this invention provides a compound of formula VII:

wherein R², R³, R⁴, R⁵, R⁶, R⁷, R^(8a), R^(8b), W, a, b, c and m are as defined herein (including any specific or preferred embodiments); and each R¹¹ is independently selected from (1-4C)alkyl, (2-4C)alkenyl, (2-4C)alkynyl, (3-6C)cycloalkyl, cyano, halo, —OR^(11a), —C(O)OR^(11b), —SR^(11c), —S(O)R^(11d), —S(O)₂R^(11e) and —NR^(11f)R^(11g); wherein R^(11a), R^(11b), R^(11c), R^(11d), R^(11e), R^(11f) and R^(11g) are independently selected from hydrogen, (1-4C)alkyl or phenyl-(1-4C)alkyl; and p is 0, 1 or 2; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate or stereoisomer thereof.

In another particular aspect, this invention provides a compound of formula VIII:

or the corresponding pyridine N-oxide; wherein R², R³, R⁴, R⁵, R⁶, R⁷, R^(8a), R^(8b), W, a, b, c and m are as defined herein (including any specific or preferred embodiments); and each R¹² is independently selected from (1-4C)alkyl, (2-4C)alkenyl, (2-4C)alkynyl, (3-6C)cycloalkyl, cyano, halo, —OR^(12a), —C(O)OR^(12b), —SR^(12c), —S(O)R^(12d), —S(O)₂R^(12e) and —NR^(2f)R^(12g); wherein R^(12a), R^(12b), R^(12c), R^(12d), R^(12e), R^(12f) and R^(12g) are independently selected from hydrogen, (1-4C)alkyl or phenyl-(1-4C)alkyl; and q is 0, 1 or 2; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate or stereoisomer thereof.

In another of its composition aspects, this invention provides a pharmaceutical composition comprising a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of formula I or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate or stereoisomer thereof. Such pharmaceutical compositions may optionally contain other therapeutic agents. Accordingly, in one embodiment, this invention is directed to such a pharmaceutical composition wherein the composition further comprises a therapeutically effective amount of a steroidal anti-inflammatory agent, such as a corticosteroid.

Compounds of this invention possess both β₂ adrenergic receptor agonist activity and muscarinic receptor antagonist activity. Accordingly, the compounds of formula I are expected to be useful as therapeutic agents for treating pulmonary disorders, such as asthma and chronic obstructive pulmonary disease.

Accordingly, in one of its method aspects, this invention provides a method for treating a pulmonary disorder, the method comprising administering to a patient in need of treatment a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of formula I or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate or stereoisomer thereof.

Additionally, in another of its method aspects, this invention provides a method of producing bronchodilation in a patient, the method comprising administering to a patient requiring bronchodilation a bronchodilation-producing amount of a compound of formula I or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate or stereoisomer thereof.

This invention also provides a method of treating chronic obstructive pulmonary disease or asthma, the method comprising administering to a patient in need of treatment a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of formula I or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate or stereoisomer thereof.

Since compounds of this invention possess both β₂ adrenergic receptor agonist activity and muscarinic receptor antagonist activity, such compounds are also useful as research tools. Accordingly, in yet another of its method aspects, this invention provides a method for using a compound of formula I or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate or stereoisomer thereof as a research tool for studying a biological system or sample, or for discovering new chemical compounds having both β₂ adrenergic agonist activity and muscarinic receptor antagonist activity.

This invention also provides processes and novel intermediates useful for preparing compounds of formula I or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate or stereoisomer thereof. Accordingly, in another of its method aspects, this invention provides a process of preparing a compound of formula I, the process comprising:

(a) reacting a compound of formula 1 or a salt thereof, with a compound of formula 2;

(b) reacting a compound of formula 3 or a salt thereof, with a compound of formula 4;

(c) coupling a compound of formula 5 with a compound of formula 6;

(d) for a compound of formula I wherein R⁵ represents a hydrogen atom, reacting a compound of formula 3 with a compound of formula 7 or a hydrate thereof, in the presence of a reducing agent;

(e) reacting a compound of formula 1 with a compound of formula 8 or a hydrate thereof, in the presence of a reducing agent;

(f) reacting a compound of formula 9, with a compound of formula 10; or

(g) reacting a compound of formula 11 or a hydrate thereof, with a compound of formula 10, in the presence of a reducing agent;

(h) reacting a compound of formula 12, with a compound of the formula: R¹⁻B(OH)₂ in the presence of a coupling catalyst;

and then removing any protecting groups to form a compound of formula I; wherein the compounds of formula 1-12 are as defined therein.

In one embodiment, the above process further comprises the step of forming a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of a compound of formula 1. In other embodiments, this invention is directed to the other processes described herein; and to the product prepared by any of the processes described herein.

In a particular embodiment, this invention is directed to a compound of formula 12, which compound is useful as an intermediate in preparing compounds of formula 1.

This invention provides a compound of formula I or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate or stereoisomer thereof, for use in therapy or as a medicament.

Additionally, this invention is directed to the use of a compound of formula I or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate or stereoisomer thereof, for the manufacture of a medicament; especially for the manufacture of a medicament for the treatment of a pulmonary disorder.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION

In one of its composition aspects, this invention is directed to novel compounds of formula I or pharmaceutically acceptable salts or solvates or stereoisomers thereof. These compounds contain one or more chiral centers and therefore, this invention is directed to racemic mixtures; pure stereoisomers (i.e., enantiomers or diastereomers); stereoisomer-enriched mixtures and the like unless otherwise indicated. When a particular stereoisomer is shown or named herein, it will be understood by those skilled in the art that minor amounts of other stereoisomers may be present in the compositions of this invention unless otherwise indicated, provided that the utility of the composition as a whole is not eliminated by the presence of such other isomers.

In particular, compounds of formula I contain a chiral center at the carbon atom indicated by the symbol * in the following formula:

In one embodiment of this invention, the carbon atom identified by the symbol * has the (R) configuration. In this embodiment, it is preferred for compounds of formula I to have the (R) configuration at the carbon atom identified by the symbol * or to be enriched in a stereoisomeric form having the (R) configuration at this carbon atom. In another embodiment of this invention, the carbon atom identified by the symbol * has the (S) configuration. In this embodiment, it is preferred for compounds of formula I to have the (S) configuration at the carbon atom identified by the symbol * or to be enriched in a stereoisomeric form having the (S) configuration at this carbon atom. In some cases, in order to optimize the β₂ adrenergic agonist activity of the compounds of this invention, it is preferred that the carbon atom identified by the symbol * has the (R) configuration.

The compounds of formula I also contain several basic groups (e.g., amino groups) and therefore, the compounds of formula I can exist as the free base or in various salt forms. All such salt forms are included within the scope of this invention. Furthermore, solvates of compounds of formula I or salts thereof are included within the scope of this invention.

Additionally, where applicable, all cis-trans or E/Z isomers (geometric isomers), tautomeric forms and topoisomeric forms of the compounds of formula I are included within the scope of this invention unless otherwise specified.

The nomenclature used herein to name the compounds of this invention and intermediates thereof has generally been derived using the commercially-available AutoNom software (MDL, San Leandro, Calif.). Typically, compounds of formula I wherein W is O have been named as ester derivatives of carbamic acid; and compounds of formula I wherein W is NW^(a) have been named as urea derivatives.

Representative Embodiments

The following substituents and values are intended to provide representative examples of various aspects and embodiments of this invention. These representative values are intended to further define and illustrate such aspects and embodiments and are not intended to exclude other embodiments or to limit the scope of this invention. In this regard, the representation that a particular value or substituent is preferred is not intended in any way to exclude other values or substituents from this invention unless specifically indicated.

In one embodiment of this invention, W is O. In another embodiment, W is NW^(a). Generally, it has been found that compounds in which W represents O exhibit particularly high affinity for muscarinic and β₂ adrenergic receptors. Accordingly, in a particular embodiment of this invention, W preferably represents O.

When W is NW^(a), W^(a) is hydrogen or (1-4C)alkyl; such as hydrogen, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, ii-butyl, sec-butyl, isobutyl and tert-butyl. In one embodiment, W^(a) is hydrogen or (1-3C)alkyl. In another embodiment, W^(a) is hydrogen, methyl or ethyl; such as hydrogen or methyl. In yet another embodiment, W^(a) is hydrogen and NW^(a) is NH.

In a particular embodiment, when W is NW^(a), R⁶ is —N(R^(6a))C(O)R^(6b)(e.g., —NHCHO) and R⁷ is hydrogen; or R⁶ and R⁷ together form —N(R^(7a))C(O)C(R^(7b))═C(R^(7c)) (e.g., —NHC(O)CH═CH—).

When b is 0 and m is 2 (such that W is attached to a piperidine ring), a particular embodiment of interest are compounds wherein W is attached to the piperidine ring at the 4-position with respect to the nitrogen atom of the piperidine ring.

In the compounds of the present invention, R¹ is an optionally substituted (2-9C)heteroaryl group or (3-7C)cycloalkyl group. In a particular embodiment, R¹ is an optionally substituted (2-9C)heteroaryl group selected from a pyrrole, imidazole, thiazole, oxazole, furan, thiophene, triazole, pyrazole, isoxazole, isothiazole, pyridine, pyridine N-oxide, pyrazine, pyridazine, pyrimidine, triazine, indole, benzofuran, benzothiophene, benzimidazole, benzthiazole, quinoline, isoquinoline, quinazoline and quinoxaline ring, where the point of attachment is at any available carbon or nitrogen ring atom. In a particular embodiment, R¹ is an optionally substituted thienyl group, such as thien-2-yl or thien-3-yl group. In another particular embodiment, R¹ is an optionally substituted thiazole group, such as a thiazol-2-yl, thiazol-4-yl group or thiazol-5-yl group. In yet another particular embodiment, R¹ is an optionally substituted pyridyl group, such as a pyrid-2-yl, pyrid-3-yl or pyrid-4-yl group or the corresponding N-oxide. In still another particular embodiment, R¹ is an optionally substituted furyl group, such as a fur-2-yl or fur-3-yl group. In another particular embodiment, R¹ is an optionally substituted pyrimidinyl group, such as a pyrimidin-2-yl, pyrimidin-4-yl or pyrimidin-4-yl group. In another particular embodiment, R¹ is an optionally substituted (3-7C)cycloalkyl group selected from cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl and cyclohexyl. In a particular embodiment, R¹ is an optionally substituted cyclopentyl group, such as cyclopentyl, 2,2-difluorocyclopentyl or 3,3-difluorocyclopentyl. In another particular embodiment, R¹ is an optionally substituted cyclohexyl group.

In a particular embodiment, the (2-9C)heteroaryl or (3-7C)cycloalkyl group of R¹ is unsubstituted or substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents selected from (1-4C)alkyl, halo, —OR^(1a) and —NR^(1f)R^(1g), wherein each alkyl group is unsubstituted or substituted with from 1 to 3 fluoro substituents. Representative substituents include, but are not limited to, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, sec-butyl, isobutyl, tert-butyl, fluoro, chloro, bromo, iodo, hydroxy, methoxy, ethoxy, isopropoxy, amino, methylamino, dimethylamino, fluoromethyl, difluoromethyl, trifluoromethyl, 2,2,2,-trifluoroethyl, fluoromethoxy, difluoromethoxy, trifluoromethoxy, 2,2,2-trifluoroethoxy and the like.

When present, each R² may be at the 3, 4, 5 or 6-position on the phenylene ring to which it is attached (where the carbon atom on the phenylene ring attached to the nitrogen atom is position 1). In one embodiment, each R² is independently selected from (1-4C)alkyl, halo, —OR^(2a) and —NR^(2f)R^(2g); wherein each alkyl group is unsubstituted or substituted with from 1 to 3 fluoro substituents. Representative substituents include, but are not limited to, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, sec-butyl, isobutyl, tert-butyl, fluoro, chloro, bromo, iodo, hydroxy, methoxy, ethoxy, isopropoxy, amino, methylamino, dimethylamino, fluoromethyl, difluoromethyl, trifluoromethyl, 2,2,2,-trifluoroethyl, fluoromethoxy, difluoromethoxy, trifluoromethoxy, 2,2,2-trifluoroethoxy and the like. Particular values for R² are fluoro or chloro.

In a particular embodiment of the compounds of formula I, a is 0, 1 or 2; including 0 or 1. In one embodiment, a is 0.

Each R^(1a), R^(1b), R^(1c), R^(1d), R^(1e), R^(1f), R^(1g), R^(1h), R^(1i), R^(1j), R^(1k), R^(1l), R^(1m), R^(1n), R^(1o), R^(1p) and R^(1q), and R^(2a), R^(2b), R^(2c), R^(2d), R^(2e), R^(2f) and R^(2g) as used in R¹ and R² respectively, is independently hydrogen, (1-4C)alkyl or phenyl-(1-4C)alkyl, where the alkyl group is unsubstituted or substituted with from 1 to 3 fluoro substituents. Representative groups include hydrogen, methyl, trifluoromethyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, sec-butyl, isobutyl, tert-butyl or benzyl. In one embodiment, these groups are independently hydrogen or (1-3C)alkyl. In another embodiment, these groups are independently hydrogen, methyl or ethyl.

In a particular embodiment of the compounds of formula I, b is 0, 1 or 2; including 0 or 1. In one embodiment, b is 0. In another embodiment, b is 1.

In one embodiment, R^(8a) and R^(8b) are independently selected from hydrogen, methyl or ethyl. A particular value for R^(8a) and R^(8b) is hydrogen. In one embodiment, b is I and R^(8a) and R^(8b) are both hydrogen.

In a particular embodiment of the compounds of formula I, m is 0, 1 or 2; including 1 or 2. In one embodiment, m is 2. When m is 1, the resulting ring is a pyrrolidine ring; and when m is 2, the resulting ring is a piperidine ring.

In a particular embodiment of the compounds of formula I, c is 0, 1 or 2; including 0 or 1. In one embodiment, c is 0.

In a particular embodiment, each R³ is independently selected from (1-4C)alkyl; such as methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, sec-butyl, isobutyl and tert-butyl. In another aspect, each R³ is independently methyl or ethyl.

When m is 2, in one embodiment, each R³ is at the 3, 4 or 5-position on the piperidine ring (where the nitrogen atom of the piperidine ring is position 1). In another embodiment, R³ is at 4-position on the piperidine ring. In yet another embodiment, each R³ is at the 2 or 6-position of the piperidine ring.

In another embodiment, R³ is at the 1-position of the piperidine ring, i.e., on the nitrogen atom of the piperidine ring thus forming a quaternary amine salt. In a particular aspect of this embodiment, each R³ is independently selected from (1-4C)alkyl; such as methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, sec-butyl, isobutyl and tert-butyl. In another aspect, each R³ is independently methyl or ethyl.

In yet another embodiment, two R³ groups are joined to form a (1-3C)alkylene or (2-3C)alkenylene group. For example, two R³ groups at the 2 and 6-positions on the piperidine ring can be joined to form an ethylene bridge (i.e., the piperidine ring and the R³ groups form an 8-azabicyclo[3.2.1]octane ring); or two R³ groups at the 1 and 4-positions on the piperidine ring can be joined to form an ethylene bridge (i.e., the piperidine ring and the R³ groups form an 1-azabicyclo[2.2.2]octane ring); or two R³ groups at the 2 and 6-positions on the piperidine ring can be joined to form an ethenylene bridge (i.e., the piperidine ring and the R³ groups form an 8-azabicyclo[3.2.1]oct-6-ene ring). In this embodiment, other R³ groups as defined herein may also be present.

In still another embodiment, two R³ groups are joined to form a oxiran-2,3-diyl group. For example, two R³ groups at the 2 and 6-positions on the piperidine ring can be joined to form a 3-oxatricyclo[3.3.1.0^(2,4)]nonane ring). In this embodiment, other R³ groups as defined herein may also be present.

Each R^(3a), R^(3b), R^(3c), R^(3d), R^(3e), R^(3f) and R^(3g) as used in R³ is independently hydrogen or (1-4C)alkyl; such as hydrogen, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, sec-butyl, isobutyl and tert-butyl. In one embodiment, these groups are independently hydrogen or (1-3C)alkyl. In another embodiment, these groups are independently hydrogen, methyl or ethyl.

In one embodiment, R⁵ is hydrogen or (1-4C)alkyl; such as hydrogen, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, sec-butyl, isobutyl and tert-butyl. In another embodiment, each R⁵ is independently hydrogen, methyl or ethyl. In a particular embodiment, R⁵ is hydrogen.

In one embodiment, R⁶ is —N(R^(6a))C(O)R^(6b) and R⁷ is hydrogen, where each of R^(6a) and R^(6b) is independently hydrogen or (1-4C)alkyl, such as hydrogen, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, sec-butyl, isobutyl and tert-butyl. In one embodiment, these groups are independently hydrogen or (1-3C)alkyl. In another embodiment, these groups are independently hydrogen, methyl or ethyl. A particular value for R⁶ in this embodiment is —NHCHO.

In another embodiment, R⁶ and R⁷ together form —N(R^(7a))C(O)—CR^(7b)═CR^(7c)—, —CR^(7d)═CR^(7e)—C(O)N(R^(7f))—, —N(R^(7g))C(O)CR^(7h)R^(7i)—CR^(7j)R^(7k)— or —CR^(7l)R^(7m)—CR^(7n)R^(7o)—C(O)N(R^(7p))—; where each of R^(7a), R^(7b), R^(7c), R^(7d), R^(7e), R^(7f), R^(7g), R^(7h), R^(7i), R^(7j), R^(7k), R^(7l), R^(7m), R^(7n), R^(7o) and R^(7p) is independently hydrogen or (1-4C)alkyl; such as hydrogen, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, sec-butyl, isobutyl and tert-butyl. In one embodiment, these groups are independently hydrogen or (1-3C)alkyl. In another embodiment, these groups are independently hydrogen, methyl or ethyl. Particular values for R⁶ and R⁷ in this embodiment are R⁶ and R⁷ together form —NHC(O)—CH═CH—, —CH═CH—C(O)—NH—, —CH₂—CH₂—C(O)NH— or —NHC(O)—CH₂—CH₂—; including where R⁶ and R⁷ together form —NHC(O)—CH═CH— or —CH═CH—C(O)—NH—; and in particular, where R⁶ and R⁷ together form —NHC(O)—CH═CH— (i.e., the nitrogen atom is attached at R⁶ and the carbon atom is attached at R⁷ to form, together with the hydroxyphenyl ring to which R⁶ and R⁷ are attached, a 8-hydroxy-2-oxo-1,2-dihydroquinolin-5-yl group).

In a particular embodiment, R⁶ is —NHCHO or —CH₂OH and R⁷ is hydrogen; or R⁶ and R⁷ together form —NHC(O)CH═CH—, —CH═CHC(O)NH—, —CH₂CH₂C(O)NH— or —NHC(O)CH₂CH₂—.

The divalent hydrocarbon group of this invention (e.g., R⁴ in formula I) contains from 4 to 28 carbon atoms and optionally containing from 1 to 10 heteroatoms selected independently from halo, oxygen, nitrogen and sulfur. In one embodiment, this group contains from 4 to 24 carbon atoms, including from 6 to 20 carbon atoms, such as from 8 to 18 carbon atoms; and optionally contains from 1 to 8 heteroatoms, including from 1 to 6 heteroatoms.

The divalent hydrocarbon may contain any arrangement of atoms including alkylene, alkenylene, alkynylene, cycloalkylene, arylene, heteroarylene and heterocyclene groups or combinations thereof. The hydrocarbon group may be interrupted by one or more heteroatoms or combinations of heteroatoms and carbon atoms to form various functional groups, such as ethers, thioethers, amines, amides, esters, carbamates, ureas, sulfones, sulfoxides, sulfonamides and the like.

In a particular aspect of this invention, the divalent hydrocarbon group of the compounds of this invention (e.g., R⁴ in formula 1) is a divalent group of the formula:

—(R^(4a))_(d)-(A¹)_(e)-(R^(4b))_(f)-Q—(R^(4c))_(g)-(A²)_(h)-R^(4d))_(i)—

wherein

d, e, f, g, h and i are each independently selected from 0 and 1;

R^(4a), R^(4b), R^(4c) and R^(4d) are each independently selected from (1-10C)alkylene, (2-10C)alkenylene and (2-10C)alkynylene, wherein each alkylene, alkenylene or alkynylene group is unsubstituted or substituted with from 1 to 5 substituents independently selected from (1-4C)alkyl, fluoro, hydroxy, phenyl and phenyl-(1-4C)alkyl; or R^(4d) represents (1-6C)alkylene-NHC(O)-(1-6C)alkylene;

A¹ and A² are each independently selected from (3-7C)cycloalkylene, (6-10C)arylene, —O-(6-10C)arylene, (6-10C)arylene-O—, (2-9C)heteroarylene, —O-(2-9C)heteroarylene, (2-9C)heteroarylene-O— and (3-6C)heterocyclene, wherein each cycloalkylene is unsubstituted or substituted with from 1 to 4 substituents selected independently from (1-4C)alkyl, and each arylene, heteroarylene or heterocyclene group is unsubstituted or substituted with from 1 to 4 substituents independently selected from halo, (1-4C)alkyl, (1-4C)alkoxy, —S-(1-4C)alkyl, —S(O)—(1-4C)alkyl, —S(O)₂—(1-4C)alkyl, —C(O)O(1-4C)alkyl, carboxy, cyano, hydroxy, nitro, trifluoromethyl and trifluoromethoxy;

Q is selected from a bond, —O—, —C(O)O—, —OC(O)—, —S—, —S(O)—, —S(O)₂—, —N(Q^(a))C(O)—, —C(O)N(Q^(b))-, —N(Q^(c))S(O)₂—, —S(O)₂N(Q^(d))-, —N(Q^(e))C(O)N(Q^(f))-, —N(Q^(g))S(O)₂N(Q^(h))-, —OC(O)N(Q^(i))-, —N(Q^(j))C(O)O— and —N(Q^(k)); where Q^(a), Q^(b), Q^(c), Q^(d), Q^(e), Q^(f), Q^(g), Q^(h), Q^(i), Q^(j) and Q^(k) are each independently selected from hydrogen, (1-6C)alkyl, A³ and (1-4C)alkylene-A⁴, wherein the alkyl group is unsubstituted or substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents independently selected from fluoro, hydroxy and (1-4C)alkoxy; or together with the nitrogen atom and the group R^(4b) or R^(4c) to which they are attached, form a 4 to 6 membered azacycloalkylene group; and

A³ and A⁴ are each independently selected from (3-6C)cycloalkyl, (6-10C)aryl, (2-9C)heteroaryl and (3-6C)heterocyclyl, wherein each cycloalkyl is unsubstituted or substituted with from 1 to 4 substituents selected independently from (1-4C)alkyl and each aryl, heteroaryl or heterocyclyl group is unsubstituted or substituted with from 1 to 4 substituents independently selected from halo, (1-4C)alkyl and (1-4C)alkoxy.

In the compound of this invention, the values of each of the components R^(4a), A¹, R^(4b), Q, R^(4c), A² and R^(4d) are selected such that the number of contiguous atoms in the shortest chain between the two nitrogen atoms to which R⁴ is attached is in the range of from 4 to 16, (specifically, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15 or 16); including 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13 or 14; such as 8, 9, 10 or 11; or 9 or 10. When selecting values for each variable in R⁴, it will be appreciated by those skilled in the art that values should be selected such that a chemically stable group is formed.

When determining the number of contiguous atoms in the shortest chain between the two nitrogen atoms to which R⁴ is attached, each contiguous atom of the chain is counted consecutively starting from the first atom in the R⁴ group adjacent to the nitrogen of the piperidine ring (i.e., when m is 2) and ending with the last atom in the R⁴ group adjacent to the nitrogen of the aminohydroxyethyl group. Where two or more chains are possible, the shortest chain is used to determine the number of contiguous atoms. As shown below, for example, when R⁴ is —(CH₂)₂—NHC(O)—CH₂-(phen-1,4-ylene)-CH₂—, there are 10 contiguous atoms in the shortest chain counted consecutively starting from the first atom in the R⁴ group adjacent to the nitrogen of the piperidine ring (i.e., when m is 2) ending with the last atom in the R⁴ group adjacent to the nitrogen of the aminohydroxyethyl group as shown below:

In one embodiment of R⁴, R^(4a) is selected from (1-10C)alkylene, (2-10C)alkenylene and (2-10C)alkynylene wherein the alkylene group is unsubstituted or substituted with 1 or 2 substituents independently selected from (1-4C)alkyl, hydroxy and phenyl. Representative examples of particular values for R^(4a) are —CH₂—, —(CH₂)₂—, —(CH₂)₃—, —(CH₂)₄—, —(CH₂)₅—, —(CH₂)₆—, —(CH₂)₇—, —(CH₂)₈—, —(CH₂)₉—, —(CH₂)₁₀—, —(CH₂)CH(CH₃)—, —(CH₂)C(CH₃)₂—, and —(CH₂)₂C(phenyl)₂-. In another aspect, R^(4a) is —(CH₂)C(═CH₂)—.

In one embodiment, d is 1.

In one embodiment, A¹ is an optionally substituted (3-7C)cycloalkylene group; including a cyclohexylene group, such as cyclohex-1,4-ylene and cyclohex-1,3-ylene; and a cyclopentylene group, such as cyclopent-1,3-ylene.

In another embodiment, A¹ is an optionally substituted (6-10C)arylene group, including a phenylene group, such as phen-1,4-ylene, phen-1,3-ylene and phen-1,2-ylene; and a naphthylene group, such as naphth-1,4-ylene and napth-1,5-ylene.

In yet another embodiment, A¹ is an optionally substituted (2-9C)heteroarylene group, including a pyridylene group, such as pyrid-1,4-ylene; a furylene group, such as fur-2,5-ylene and fur-2,4-ylene; a thienylene group, such as thien-2,5-ylene and thien-2,4-ylene; and a pyrrolylene, such as pyrrol-2,5-ylene and pyrrol-2,4-ylene.

In still another embodiment, A¹ is an optionally substituted (3-6C)heterocyclene group, including a piperidinylene group, such as piperidin-1,4-ylene; and a pyrrolidinylene group, such as pyrrolidin-2,5-ylene.

In a particular embodiment, A¹ is an optionally substituted phenylene, thienylene, cyclopentylene, cyclohexylene or piperidinylene.

In one embodiment, e is 0.

In a particular embodiment, R^(4b) is (1-5C)alkylene. Representative examples of particular values for R^(4b) are —CH₂—, —(CH₂)₂—, —(CH₂)₃—, —(CH₂)₄—, —(CH₂)₅—; including methylene, ethylene and propylene.

In one embodiment, f is 0.

In a particular embodiment, Q is selected from a bond, —O—, —N(Q^(a))C(O)—, —C(O)N(Q^(b))-, —N(Q^(c))S(O)₂—, —S(O)₂N(Q^(d))-, —N(Q^(e))C(O)N(Q^(f))-, —OC(O)N(Q^(i))-, —N(Q^(j))C(O)O— or —N(Q^(k)); such as where Q is a bond, —N(Q^(a))C(O)— or —C(O)N(Q^(b))-. Representative examples of particular values for Q are a bond, O, NH, —C(O)NH—, —C(O)N(CH₃)—, —NHC(O)—, —N(CH₃)C(O)—, —S(O)₂NH—, —S(O)₂N(CH₃)—, —NHS(O)₂—, —N(CH₃)S(O)₂— and —NHC(O)NH—. Another example of a value for Q, together with R^(4c), is —C(O)(piperidin-1,4-ylene).

In one embodiment, Q^(a), Q^(b), Q^(c), Q^(d), Q^(e), Q^(f), Q^(g), Q^(h), Q^(i), Q^(j) and Q^(k) are each independently selected from hydrogen and (1-6C)alkyl, wherein the alkyl group is unsubstituted or substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents independently selected from fluoro, hydroxy and (1-4C)alkoxy. For example, Q^(a), Q^(b), Q^(c), Q^(d), Q^(e), Q^(f), Q^(g), Q^(h), Q^(i), Q^(j) and Q^(k) are each independently selected from hydrogen, and (1-3C)alkyl, including hydrogen, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl and isopropyl. An example of a value for each of Q^(a), Q^(b), Q^(c), Q^(d), Q^(e), Q^(f), Q^(g), Q^(h), Q^(i), Q^(j) and Q^(k) is hydrogen.

In another embodiment, Q^(a), Q^(b), Q^(c), Q^(d), Q^(e), Q^(f), Q^(g), Q^(h), Q^(i), Q^(j) and Q^(k) together with the nitrogen atom and the group R^(4b) or R^(4c) to which they are attached, form a 4-6 membered azacycloalkylene group. For example, Q^(a) and Q^(b) together with the nitrogen atom and the group R^(4b) or R^(4c) to which they are attached, form a piperidin-4-ylene group. By way of illustration, when Q represents —N(Q^(a))C(O)— and Q^(a) together with the nitrogen atom and the group R^(4b) to which it is attached, forms a piperidin-4-ylene group, R⁴ is a group of formula:

Similarly, when Q represents —C(O)N(Q^(b))- and Q^(b) together with the nitrogen atom and the group R^(4c) to which it is attached, forms a piperidin-4-ylene group, R⁴ is a group of formula:

In a particular embodiment, R^(4c) is (1-5C)alkylene. Representative examples of particular values for R^(4c) are —CH₂—, —(CH₂)₂—, —(CH₂)₃—, —(CH₂)₄—, —(CH₂)₅—; including methylene, ethylene and propylene.

In one embodiment, A² is an optionally substituted (3-7C)cycloalkylene group; including a cyclohexylene group, such as cyclohex-1,4-ylene and cyclohex-1,3-ylene; and a cyclopentylene group, such as cyclopent-1,3-ylene.

In another embodiment, A² is an optionally substituted (6-10C)arylene group, including a phenylene group, such as phen-1,4-ylene, phen-1,3-ylene and phen-1,2-ylene; and a naphthylene group, such as naphth-1,4-ylene and napth-1,5-ylene.

In yet another embodiment, A² is an optionally substituted (2-9C)heteroarylene group, including a pyridylene group, such as pyrid-1,4-ylene; a furylene group, such as fur-2,5-ylene and fur-2,4-ylene; a thienylene group, such as thien-2,5-ylene and thien-2,4-ylene; and a pyrrolylene, such as pyrrol-2,5-ylene and pyrrol-2,4-ylene.

In still another embodiment, A² is an optionally substituted (3-6C)heterocyclene group, including a piperidinylene group, such as piperidin-1,4-ylene; and a pyrrolidinylene group, such as pyrrolidin-2,5-ylene.

In a particular embodiment, A² is optionally substituted phenylene, thienylene, cyclopentylene, cyclohexylene or piperidinylene.

By way of illustration, either A¹ or A² or both can be phenylene, such as phen-1,4-ylene or phen-1,3-ylene, where the phenylene group is unsubstituted or substituted with from 1 to 4 substituents independently selected from halo, (1-4C)alkyl, (1-4C)alkoxy, —S-(1-4C)alkyl, —S(O)—(1-4C)alkyl, —S(O)₂-(1-4C)alkyl, —C(O)O(1-4C)alkyl, carboxy, cyano, hydroxy, nitro, trifluoromethyl and trifluoromethoxy. Representative examples include phen-1,3-ylene, phen-1,4-ylene, 4-chlorophen-1,3-ylene, 6-chlorophen-1,3-ylene, 4-methylphen-1,3-ylene, 2-fluorophen-1,4-ylene, 2-chlorophen-1,4-ylene, 2-bromophen-1,4-ylene, 2-iodophen-1,4-ylene, 2-methylphen-1,4-ylene, 2-methoxyphen-1,4-ylene, 2-trifluoromethoxyphen-1,4-ylene, 3-nitrophen-1,4-ylene, 3-chlorophen-1,4-ylene, 2,5-difluorophen-1,4-ylene, 2,6-dichlorophen-1,4-ylene, 2,6-dilodophen-1,4-ylene, 2-chloro-6-methylphen-1,4-ylene, 2-chloro-5-methoxyphen-1,4-ylene, 2,3,5,6-tetrafluorophen-1,4-ylene.

Alternatively, A¹ or A² or both can be cyclopentylene or cyclohexylene; wherein the cyclopentylene or cyclohexylene group is unsubstituted or substituted with (1-4C)alkyl Representative examples include cis-cyclopent-1,3-ylene, trans-cyclopent-1,3-ylene, cis-cyclohex-1,4-ylene and trans-cyclohex-1,4-ylene A¹ or A² or both can also be optionally substituted thienylene or piperidinylene, for example, thien-2,5-ylene or piperidin-1,4-ylene.

In one embodiment, R^(4d) is selected from (1-10C)alkylene, (2-10C)alkenylene and (2-10C)alkynylene wherein the alkylene is unsubstituted or substituted with 1 or 2 substituents independently selected from (1-4C)alkyl, hydroxy and phenyl. Representative examples of particular values for R^(4d) are —CH₂—, —(CH₂)₂—, —(CH₂)₃—, —(CH₂)₄—, —(CH₂)₅—, —(CH₂)₆—, —(CH₂)₇—, —(CH₂)₈—, —(CH₂)₉—, —(CH₂)₁₀—, —(CH₂)CH(CH₃)—, —(CH₂)C(CH₃)₂— and —(CH₂)₂C(phenyl)₂-.

In a particular embodiment, R⁴ is a divalent group of the formula: —(R^(4a))_(d)— where R^(4a) is (4-10C)alkylene. In one aspect of this embodiment, R⁴ is a divalent group of the formula: —(CH₂)_(j)— where j is 8, 9 or 10. Examples of particular values for R⁴ in this embodiment are —(CH₂)₄—, —(CH₂)₅—, —(CH₂)₆—, —(CH₂)₇—, —(CH₂)₈—, —(CH₂)₉, and —(CH₂)₁₀—; including —(CH₂)₈—, —(CH₂)₉— and —(CH₂)₁₀—.

In another particular embodiment, R⁴ is a divalent group of the formula:

—(R^(4a))_(d)-(A²)_(h)-(R^(4d))_(i)—

where R^(4a) is (1-10C)alkylene, such as —(CH₂)—, —(CH₂)₂—, —(CH₂)₃—; A² is (6-10C)arylene, such as phen-1,4-ylene or phen-1,3-ylene, or (2-9C)heteroarylene, such as thien-2,5-ylene or thien-2,4-ylene; and R^(4d) is (1-10C)alkylene, such as —(CH₂)—, —(CH₂)₂—, —(CH₂)₃—. Examples of particular values for R⁴ in this embodiment are —(CH₂)-(phen-1,4-ylene)-(CH₂)—; —(CH₂)-(phen-1,4-ylene)-(CH₂)₂—; —(CH₂)-(phen-1,4-ylene)-(CH₂)₃—; —(CH₂)₂-(phen-1,4-ylene)-(CH₂)—; —(CH₂)₂-(phen-1,4-ylene)-(CH₂)₂—; —(CH₂)₂-(phen-1,4-ylene)-(CH₂)₃—; —(CH₂)₃-(phen-1,4-ylene)-(CH₂)—; —(CH₂)₃-(phen-1,4-ylene)-(CH₂)₂—, —(CH₂)₃-(phen-1,4-ylene)-(CH₂)₃—, —(CH₂)₄-(phen-1,4-ylene)-(CH₂)—; —(CH₂)₄-(phen-1,4-ylene)-(CH₂)₂— and —(CH₂)₄-(phen-1,4-ylene)-(CH₂)₃—.

In yet another particular embodiment, R⁴ is a divalent group of the formula:

—(R^(4a))_(d)-Q-(A²)_(h)-(R^(4d))_(i)—

where Q is —O— or —N(Q^(k))-; Q^(k) is hydrogen or (1-3C)alkyl, such as methyl or ethyl; R^(4a) is (1-10C)alkylene, such as —(CH₂)—, —(CH₂)₂—, —(CH₂)₃—; A² is (6-10C)arylene, such as phen-1,4-ylene or phen-1,3-ylene, or (2-9C)heteroarylene, such as thien-2,5-ylene or thien-2,4-ylene; and R^(4d) is (1-10C)alkylene, such as —(CH₂)—, —(CH₂)₂—, —(CH₂)₃—. In this embodiment, the (6-10C)arylene or (2-9C)heteroarylene group is unsubstituted or substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents independently selected from halo, (1-4C)alkyl, (1-4C)alkoxy, —S-(1-4C)alkyl, —S(O)—(1-4C)alkyl, —S(O)₂-(1-4C)alkyl, —C(O)O(1-4C)alkyl, carboxy, cyano, hydroxy, nitro, trifluoromethyl and trifluoromethoxy; such as methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, sec-butyl, isobutyl, tert-butyl, fluoro, chloro, bromo, iodo, hydroxy, methoxy, ethoxy, isopropoxy, trifluoromethyl and trifluoromethoxy, and the like. Examples of particular values for R⁴ in this embodiment are —(CH₂)₂—O-(phen-1,4-ylene)-(CH₂)—; —(CH₂)₂—O-(phen-1,4-ylene)-(CH₂)₂—; —(CH₂)₂—O-(phen-1,4-ylene)-(CH₂)₃—; —(CH₂)₃—O-(phen-1,4-ylene)-(CH₂)—; —(CH₂)₃—O-(phen-1,4-ylene)-(CH₂)₂—; —(CH₂)₃—O-(phen-1,4-ylene)-(CH₂)₃—; —(CH₂)₂—NH-(phen-1,4-ylene)-(CH₂)—; —(CH₂)₂—NH-(phen-1,4-ylene)-(CH₂)₂—; —(CH₂)₂—NH-(phen-1,4-ylene)-(CH₂)₃—; —(CH₂)₃—NH-(phen-1,4-ylene)-(CH₂)—; —(CH₂)₃—NH-(phen-1,4-ylene)-(CH₂)₂—; —(CH₂)₃—NH-(phen-1,4-ylene)-(CH₂)₃—; —(CH₂)₂—NH-(2-fluorophen-1,4-ylene)-(CH₂)—; —(CH₂)₂—NH-(2-chlorophen-1,4-ylene)-(CH₂)—; —(CH₂)₂—NH-(5-methoxyphen-1,4-ylene)-(CH₂)—; —(CH₂)₂—NH-(2-chloro-5-methoxyphen-1,4-ylene)-(CH₂)—; and —(CH₂)₂—NH-(2-chloro-5-ethoxyphen-1,4-ylene)-(CH₂)—.

In yet another particular embodiment, R⁴ is a divalent group of the formula:

—(R^(4a))_(d)-(A¹)_(e)-(R^(4b))_(f)-Q—(R^(4c))_(g)-(A²)_(h)-(R^(4d))_(i)—

where Q is —N(Q^(a))C(O)— or —C(O)N(Q^(b))-. A particular value for R⁴ in this embodiment is the formula:

where za is an integer from 2 to 10; and zb is an integer from 2 to 10; provided that za+zb is an integer from 4 to 12. In this formula for R⁴, d and g are 1 and e, f, h and i are 0; and R^(4a) is —(CH₂)_(za)—, R^(4c) is —(CH₂)_(zb)— and Q is —C(O)NH—. Particular values for za are 2 or 3; and for zb, 4, 5 or 6.

Another particular value for R⁴ is the formula:

where zc is an integer from 2 to 7; and zd is an integer from 1 to 6; provided that zc+zd is an integer from 3 to 8. In this formula for R⁴, d, h and i are 1 and e, f and g are 0; and R^(4a) is —(CH₂)_(zc)—, A² is phen-1,4-ylene, R^(4d) is —(CH₂)_(zd)— and Q is C(O)NH—. Particular values for zc are 2 or 3; and for zd, 1 or 2. In this embodiment, the phen-1,4-ylene group may be optionally substituted as defined herein for A².

Another particular value for R⁴ is the formula:

where ze is an integer from 2 to 6; zf is an integer from 1 to 5; and zg is an integer from 1 to 5; provided that ze+zf+zg is an integer from 4 to 8. In this formula for R⁴, d, g, h and i are 1 and e and f are 0; and R^(4a) is —(CH₂)_(ze)—, R^(4c) is —(CH₂)_(zf)—, A is 1,4-phenylene, R^(4d) is —(CH₂)_(zg)— and Q is —C(O)NH—Particular values for ze are 2 or 3; for zf, 1 or 2; and for zg, 1 or 2. In this embodiment, the phen-1,4-ylene group may be optionally substituted as defined herein for A².

Another particular value for R⁴ is the formula:

where zh is an integer from 2 to 10; and zi is an integer from 2 to 10; provided that zh+zi is an integer from 4 to 12. In this formula for R⁴, d and g are I and e, f, h and i are 0; and R^(4a) is —(CH₂)_(zh)—, R^(4c) is —(CH₂)_(zi)— and Q is —NHC(O)—. Particular values for zh are 2 or 3; and for zi, 4, 5 or 6.

Another particular value for R⁴ is the formula:

where zj is an integer from 2 to 7; and zk is an integer from 1 to 6; provided that zj+zk is an integer from 3 to 8. In this formula for R⁴, d, h and i are 1 and e, f and g are 0; and R^(4a) is —(CH₂)_(zj)—, A² is 1,4-phenylene, R^(4d) is —(CH₂)_(zk)— and Q is —NHC(O)—. Particular values for zj are 2 or 3; and for zk, 1 or 2. In this embodiment, the phen-1,4-ylene group may be optionally substituted as defined herein for A².

Another particular value for R⁴ is the formula:

where zl is an integer from 2 to 6; zm is an integer from 1 to 5; and zn is an integer from 1 to 5; provided that zl+zm+zn is an integer from 4 to 8. In this formula for R⁴, d, g, h and i are 1 and e and f are 0; and R^(4a) is —(CH₂)_(zl)—, R^(4c) is —(CH₂)_(zm)—, A² is 1,4-phenylene, R^(4d) is —(CH₂)_(zn)— and Q is —NHC(O)—. Particular values for zl are 2 or 3; for zm, 1 or 2; and for zn, 1 or 2. In this embodiment, the phen-1,4-ylene group may be optionally substituted as defined herein for A².

By way of further illustration, R⁴ can be selected from:

-   —(CH₂)₇—; -   —(CH₂)₈—; -   —(CH₂)₉—; -   —(CH₂)₁₀—; -   —(CH₂)₁₁—; -   —(CH₂)₂C(O)NH(CH₂)₅—; -   —(CH₂)₂N(CH₃)C(O)(CH₂)₅—; -   —(CH₂)₂C(O)NH(phen-1,4-ylene)CH₂—; -   —(CH₂)₂NHC(O)(phen-1,4-ylene)CH₂—; -   —(CH₂)₂NHC(O)NH(CH₂)₅—; -   —(CH₂)₃NHC(O)NH(CH₂)₅—; -   —(CH₂)₂C(O)NHCH₂(cyclohex-1,3-ylene)CH₂—; -   —(CH₂)₂NHC(O)(cyclopent-1,3-ylene)-; -   —(CH₂)₂NHC(O)NH(phen-1,4-ylene)(CH₂)₂—; -   1-[—(CH₂)₂C(O)](piperidin-4-yl)(CH₂)₂—; -   —(CH₂)₂NHC(O)(trans-cyclohex-1,4-ylene)CH₂—; -   —(CH₂)₂NHC(O)(cis-cyclopent-1,3-ylene)-; -   —(CH₂)₂NH(phen-1,4-ylene)(CH₂)₂—; -   1-[—(CH₂)₂NHC(O)](piperidin-4-yl)(CH₂)₂—; -   —CH₂(phen-1,4-ylene)NH(phen-1,4-ylene)CH₂—; -   —(CH₂)₂C(O)NHCH₂(phen-1,3-ylene)CH₂—; -   —(CH₂)₂C(O)NHCH₂(pyrid-2,6-ylene)CH₂—; -   —(CH₂)₂C(O)NH(cis-cyclohex-1,4-ylene)CH₂—; -   —(CH₂)₂C(O)NH(trans-cyclohex-1,4-ylene)CH₂—; -   —(CH₂)₂NHC(O)(cis-cyclopent-1,3-ylene)CH₂—; -   —(CH₂)₂N(CH₃)C(O)(phen-1,3-ylene)CH₂—; -   —(CH₂)₂N(CH₃)C(O)(trans-cyclohex-1,4-ylene)CH₂—; -   —(CH₂)₂C(O)NH(phen-1,4-ylene)C*H(CH₃)— ((S)-isomer); -   —(CH₂)₂C(O)NH(phen-1,4-ylene)C*H(CH₃)— ((R)-isomer); -   2-[(S)-(—CH₂—](pyrrolidin-1-yl)C(O)(CH₂)₄—; -   2-[(S)—(—CH₂—](pyrrolidin-1-yl)C(O)(phen-1,4-ylene)CH₂—; -   —(CH₂)₂C(O)NH(4-chlorophen-1,3-ylene)CH₂—; -   —CH₂(2-fluorophen-1,3-ylene)CH₂—; -   —(CH₂)₂C(O)NH(4-methylphen-1,3-ylene)CH₂—; -   —(CH₂)₂C(O)NH(6-chlorophen-1,3-ylene)CH₂—; -   —(CH₂)₂C(O)NH(2-chlorophen-1,4-ylene)CH₂—; -   —(CH₂)₂C(O)NH(2,6-dichlorophen-1,4-ylene)CH₂—; -   —(CH₂)₂NHC(O)NHCH₂(phen-1,3-ylene)CH₂—; -   4-[—CH₂—](piperidin-1-yl)C(O)(phen-1,4-ylene)CH₂—; -   5-(CH₂)₂C(O)N(CH₂CH₃)(phen-1,4-ylene)CH₂—; -   1-[—(CH₂)₂NHC(O)](piperidin-4-yl)-; -   —(CH₂)₂C(O)NH(phen-1,4-ylene)(CH₂)₂—; -   —(CH₂)₂NHC(O)(thien-2,5-ylene)CH₂—; -   —(CH₂)₂N(CH₃)C(O)(3-nitrophen-1,4-ylene)CH₂—; -   —(CH₂)₂N(CH₃)C(O)(trans-cyclohex-1,4-ylene)-; -   1-[—CH₂(2-fluorophen-1,3-ylene)CH₂](piperidin-4-yl)-; -   5-[—(CH₂)₂NHC(O)](pyrid-2-yl)CH₂—; -   —(CH₂)₂(phen-1,4-ylene)(CH₂)₂—; -   —(CH₂)₃(thien-2,5-ylene)(CH₂)₃—; -   —(CH₂)₂(phen-1,4-ylene)NH(phen-1,4-ylene)(CH₂)₂—; -   —CH₂(phen-1,2-ylene)NH(phen-1,4-ylene)(CH₂)₂—; -   1-[—CH₂(2-fluorophen-1,3-ylene)CH₂](piperidin-4-yl)(CH₂)₂—; -   1-[—CH₂(2-fluorophen-1,3-ylene)CH₂](piperidin-4-yl)CH₂—; -   —(CH₂)₂C(O)NH(3-chlorophen-1,4-ylene)CH₂—; -   —(CH₂)₂C(O)NH(2-(CF₃O—)phen-1,4-ylene)CH₂—; -   —(CH₂)₃(phen-1,3-ylene)NH(phen-1,4-ylene)(CH₂)₂—; -   —(CH₂)₂S(O)₂NH(CH₂)₅—; -   —CH₂(phen-1,3-ylene)NH(phen-1,4-ylene)(CH₂)₂—; -   —(CH₂)₂C(O)NH(2-iodophen-1,4-ylene)CH₂—; -   —(CH₂)₂C(O)NH(2-chloro-5-methoxyphen-1,4-ylene)CH₂—; -   —(CH₂)₂C(O)NH(2-chloro-6-methylphen-1,4-ylene)CH₂—; -   —(CH₂)₂N(CH₃)S(O)₂(phen-1,4-ylene)CH₂—; -   —(CH₂)₂C(O)NH(2-bromophen-1,4-ylene)CH₂—; -   —(CH₂)₃(phen-1,4-ylene)NH(phen-1,4-ylene)(CH₂)₂—; -   —(CH₂)₃(phen-1,2-ylene)NH(phen-1,4-ylene)(CH₂)₂—; -   1-[—CH₂(2-fluorophen-1,3-ylene)CH₂](piperidin-4-yl)(CH₂)₃—; -   —(CH₂)₂C(O)NH(2-methoxyphen-1,4-ylene)CH₂—; -   —(CH₂)₅NH(phen-1,4-ylene)(CH₂)₂—; -   4-[—(CH₂)₂-](piperidin-1-yl)(phen-1,4-ylene)(CH₂)₂—; -   —(CH₂)₂C(O)NH(phen-1,4-ylene)CH(CH₃)CH₂—; -   —(CH₂)₂-(trans-cyclohex-1,4-ylene)NH(phen-1,4-ylene)(CH₂)₂—; -   —(CH₂)₂C(O)NH(2-fluorophen-1,4-ylene)CH₂—; -   —(CH₂)₂(phen-1,3-ylene)NH(phen-1,4-ylene)(CH₂)₂—; -   —(CH₂)₂C(O)NH(2,5-difluorophen-1,4-ylene)CH₂—; -   —(CH₂)₂NHC(O)(phen-1,4-ylene)(CH₂)₂—; -   1-[—CH₂(pyrid-2,6-ylene)CH₂](piperidin-4-yl)CH₂—; -   —(CH₂)₃NH(phen-1,4-ylene)(CH₂)₂—; -   —(CH₂)₂NH(naphth-1,4-ylene)(CH₂)₂—; -   —(CH₂)₃O(phen-1,4-ylene)CH₂—; -   1-[—(CH₂)₃](piperidin-4-yl)CH₂—; -   4-[—(CH₂)₂](piperidin-1-yl)C(O)(phen-1,4-ylene)CH₂—; -   —(CH₂)₃(phen-1,4-ylene)NHC(O)(CH₂)₂—; -   —(CH₂)₃O(phen-1,4-ylene)(CH₂)₂—; -   2-[—(CH₂)₂](benzimidazol-5-yl)CH₂—; -   —(CH₂)₂-(trans-cyclohex-1,4-ylene)NHC(O)(CH₂)₂—; -   —(CH₂)₂-(trans-cyclohex-1,4-ylene)NHC(O)(CH₂)₄—; -   —(CH₂)₂-(trans-cyclohex-1,4-ylene)NHC(O)(CH₂)₅—; -   4-[—(CH₂)₂](piperidin-1-yl)C(O)(CH₂)₂—; -   —(CH₂)₂NHC(O)NH(phen-1,4-ylene)CH₂—; -   —(CH₂)₂N(CH₃)(CH₂)₂(cis-cyclohex-1,4-ylene)-; -   —(CH₂)₂C(O)NH(2,3,5,6-tetrafluorophen-1,4-ylene)CH₂—; -   —(CH₂)₂C(O)NH(2,6-diiodophen-1,4-ylene)CH₂—; -   4-[—(CH₂)₂](piperidin-1-yl)C(O)(CH₂)₃—; -   4-[—(CH₂)₂](piperidin-1-yl)C(O)(CH₂)₄—; -   4-[—(CH₂)₂](piperidin-1-yl)C(O)(CH₂)₅—; -   —(CH₂)₂C(O)NHCH₂(phen-1,4-ylene)CH₂—; -   —(CH₂)₂NHC(O)NHCH₂(phen-1,4-ylene)CH₂—; -   —(CH₂)₂C(O)NH(2-methylphen-1,4-ylene)CH₂—; -   1-[—(CH₂)₃O(phen-1,4-ylene)(CH₂)₂](piperidin-4-yl)CH₂—; -   —(CH₂)₂C(O)NHCH₂(phen-1,3-ylene)(CH₂)₂—; -   —(CH₂)₂O(phen-1,3-ylene)CH₂—; -   —(CH₂)₂N(CH₃)C(O)CH₂O(phen-1,4-ylene)CH₂—; -   —(CH₂)₂N(CH₃)C(O)CH₂O(phen-1,3-ylene)CH₂—; -   —(CH₂)₂N(CH₃)C(O)(fur-2,5-ylene)CH₂—; -   —(CH₂)₂N(CH₃)C(O)(thien-2,5-ylene)CH₂—; -   —(CH₂)₂O(phen-1,4-ylene)O(CH₂)₂—; -   —(CH₂)₂(trans-cyclohex-1,4-ylene)NHC(O)(phen-1,4-ylene)CH₂—; -   —(CH₂)₂(trans-cyclohex-1,4-ylene)NHC(O)CH₂O(phen-1,2-ylene)CH₂—; -   —(CH₂)₂(trans-cyclohex-1,4-ylene)NHC(O)CH₂O(phen-1,3-ylene)CH₂—; -   —(CH₂)₂(trans-cyclohex-1,4-ylene)NHC(O)CH₂O(phen-1,4-ylene)CH₂—; -   —(CH₂)₂(trans-cyclohex-1,4-ylene)NHC(O)(fur-2,5-ylene)CH₂—; -   —(CH₂)₂(trans-cyclohex-1,4-ylene)NHC(O)(thien-2,5-ylene)CH₂—; -   4-[—(CH₂)₂](piperidin-1-yl)C(O)CH₂O(phen-1,2-ylene)CH₂—; -   4-[—(CH₂)₂](piperidin-1-yl)C(O)CH₂O(phen-1,3-ylene)CH₂—; -   4-[—(CH₂)₂](piperidin-1-yl)C(O)CH₂O(phen-1,4-ylene)CH₂—; -   4-[—(CH₂)₂](piperidin-1-yl)C(O)(fur-2,5-ylene)CH₂—; -   4-[—(CH₂)₂](piperidin-1-yl)C(O)(thien-2,5-ylene)CH₂—; -   —(CH₂)₂(phen-1,4-ylene)NHC(O)(phen-1,3-ylene)CH₂—; -   —(CH₂)₂(phen-1,4-ylene)NHC(O)(phen-1,4-ylene)CH₂—; -   —(CH₂)₂(phen-1,4-ylene)NHC(O)CH₂O(phen-1,2-ylene)CH₂—; -   —(CH₂)₂(phen-1,4-ylene)NHC(O)CH₂O(phen-1,3-ylene)CH₂—; -   —(CH₂)₂(phen-1,4-ylene)NHC(O)CH₂O(phen-1,4-ylene)CH₂—; -   —(CH₂)₂(phen-1,4-ylene)NHC(O)(fur-2,5-ylene)CH₂—; -   —(CH₂)₂(phen-1,4-ylene)NHC(O)(thien-2,5-ylene)CH₂—; -   —(CH₂)₂(trans-cyclohex-1,4-ylene)NHC(O)(phen-1,3-ylene)CH₂—; -   —(CH₂)₃O(phen-1,3-ylene)CH₂—; -   —CH₂CH(OH)CH₂NH(phen-1,4-ylene)(CH₂)₂—; -   —(CH₂)₄NH(phen-1,4-ylene)(CH₂)₂—; -   —(CH₂)₂C(O)NH(phen-1,4-ylene)CH₂NHC(O)CH₂—; -   —(CH₂)₂C(O)NH(phen-1,4-ylene)(CH₂)₂NHC(O)CH₂—; -   —(CH₂)₂C(O)NHCH₂(trans-cyclohex-1,4-ylene)CH₂—; -   —(CH₂)₂NHC(O)(CH₂)₅—; -   —(CH₂)₂O(phen-1,3-ylene)O(CH₂)₂—; -   —(CH₂)₂O(phen-1,2-ylene)O(CH₂)₂—; -   —CH₂(phen-1,2-ylene)O(phen-1,2-ylene)CH₂—; -   —(CH₂)₂C(O)NH(CH₂)₆—; -   —(CH₂)₃(phen-1,4-ylene)(CH₂)₃—; -   —(CH₂)₃(phen-1,4-ylene)(CH₂)₂—; -   —(CH₂)₄(phen-1,4-ylene)(CH₂)₂—; -   —(CH₂)₃(furan-2,5-ylene)(CH₂)₃—; -   —(CH₂)₂N(CH₃)C(O)NH(phen-1,4-ylene)(CH₂)₂—; -   4-[—(CH₂)₂](piperidin-1-yl)C(O)NH(phen-1,4-ylene)(CH₂)₂—; -   —(CH₂)₃(phen-1,3-ylene)(CH₂)₃—; -   —(CH₂)₃(tetrahydrofuran-2,5-ylene)(CH₂)₃—; and -   —(CH₂)₂O(phen-1,4-ylene)C(O)(CH₂)₂—.

Representative Subgeneric Groupings

The following subgeneric formulae and groupings are intended to provide representative examples of various aspects and embodiments of this invention and as such, they are not intended to exclude other embodiments or to limit the scope of this invention unless otherwise indicated.

A particular group of compounds of formula I are those where: a is 0; b is 0; c is 0; m is 2; W is O; W is attached at the 4-position of the piperidinyl ring; R⁵ is hydrogen; and R¹, R⁴, R⁶ and R⁷ are as defined herein; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate or stereoisomer thereof.

Still another particular group of compounds of formula I are those wherein: a is 0; b is 1; c is 0, 1 or 2; m is 1 or 2; W is O; W is attached at the 3-position of the pyrrolidinyl ring or the 3- or 4-position of the piperidinyl ring; R³ is (1-4C)alkyl; R⁵ is hydrogen; R^(8a) and R^(8b) are hydrogen; and R¹, R⁴, R⁶ and R⁷ are as defined herein; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate or stereoisomer thereof.

Yet another particular group of compounds of formula I are those wherein: a is 0; b is 0; c is 0; m is 2; W is O; W is attached at the 4-position of the piperidinyl ring; R⁴ is —(CH₂)_(j)— where j is 8, 9 or 10; R⁵ is hydrogen; and R¹, R⁶ and R⁷ are as defined herein; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate or stereoisomer thereof.

Another particular group of compounds of formula I are those wherein: a is 0; b is 1; c is 0, 1 or 2; m is 1 or 2; W is O; W is attached at the 3-position of the pyrrolidinyl ring or the 3- or 4-position of the piperidinyl ring; R³ is (1-4C)alkyl; R⁴ is —(CH₂)_(j)— where j is 8, 9 or 10; R⁵ is hydrogen; R^(8a) and R^(8b) are hydrogen; and R¹, R⁶ and R⁷ are as defined herein; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate or stereoisomer thereof.

Another particular group of compounds of formula I are those of formula II as defined herein; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate or stereoisomer thereof.

Another particular group of compounds of formula I are those of formula III as defined herein; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate or stereoisomer thereof.

Another particular group of compounds of formula I are those of formula IV as defined herein; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate or stereoisomer thereof.

Another particular group of compounds of formula I are those of formula V as defined herein; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate or stereoisomer thereof.

Another particular group of compounds of formula I are those of formula VI as defined herein; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate or stereoisomer thereof.

Another particular group of compounds of formula I are those of formula VII as defined herein; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate or stereoisomer thereof.

Another particular group of compounds of formula I are those of formula VIII as defined herein; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate or stereoisomer thereof.

Another particular group of compounds of formula I are those selected from:

-   (2-thien-2-ylphenyl)carbamic acid     1-{9-[(R)-2-hydroxy-2-(8-hydroxy-2-oxo-1,2-dihydroquinolin-5-yl)ethylamino]nonyl}piperidin-4-yl     ester; -   (2-thien-3-ylphenyl)carbamic acid     1-{9-[(R)-2-hydroxy-2-(8-hydroxy-2-oxo-1,2-dihydroquinolin-5-yl)ethylamino]nonyl}piperidin-4-yl     ester; -   (2,4-difluoro-6-pyridin-3-ylphenyl)carbamic acid     1-{9-[(R)-2-hydroxy-2-(8-hydroxy-2-oxo-1,2-dihydroquinolin-5-yl)ethylamino]nonyl}piperidin-4-yl     ester; -   (2-thien-3-ylphenyl)carbamic acid     1-[2-(4-{[(R)-2-hydroxy-2-(8-hydroxy-2-oxo-1,2-dihydroquinolin-5-yl)ethylamino]methyl}benzoylamino)ethyl]piperidin-4-yl     ester; -   (2-thien-3-ylphenyl)carbamic acid     1-[4-(4-{2-[(R)-2-hydroxy-2-(8-hydroxy-2-oxo-1,2-dihydroquinolin-5-yl)ethylamino]ethyl}phenyl)butyl]piperidin-4-yl     ester; -   (2-thien-3-ylphenyl)carbamic acid     1-[2-(2-chloro-4-{[(R)-2-hydroxy-2-(8-hydroxy-2-oxo-1,2-dihydroquinolin-5-yl)ethylamino]methyl}-5-methoxyphenylcarbamoyl)-ethyl]piperidin-4-yl     ester; -   [2-(4-methyl-1,3-thiazol-2-yl)phenyl]carbamic acid     1-{9-[(R)-2-hydroxy-2-(8-hydroxy-2-oxo-1,2-dihydroquinolin-5-yl)ethylamino]nonyl}piperidin-4-ylmethyl     ester; -   (2-thiophen-3-ylphenyl)carbamic acid     1-[2-(4-{[(R)-2-hydroxy-2-(8-hydroxy-2-oxo-1,2-dihydroquinolin-5-yl)ethylamino]methyl}-3-methoxyphenylcarbamoyl)ethyl]-piperidin-4-yl     ester; -   (2-thiazol-2-ylphenyl)carbamic acid     1-[2-(4-{[(R)-2-hydroxy-2-(8-hydroxy-2-oxo-1,2-dihydroquinolin-5-yl)ethylamino]methyl}-3-methoxyphenylcarbamoyl)ethyl]-piperidin-4-yl     ester; -   [2-(4-bromothiazol-2-yl)phenyl]carbamic acid     1-[2-(4-{[(R)-2-hydroxy-2-(8-hydroxy-2-oxo-1,2-dihydroquinolin-5-yl)ethylamino]methyl}-3-methoxyphenylcarbamoyl)ethyl]piperidin-4-yl     ester; -   [2-(4-methylthiazol-2-yl)phenyl]carbamic acid     1-[2-(4-{[(R)-2-hydroxy-2-(8-hydroxy-2-oxo-1,2-dihydroquinolin-5-yl)ethylamino]methyl}phenyl     carbamoyl)ethyl]-piperidin-4-yl ester; -   (2-cyclohexylphenyl)carbamic acid     1-{9-[(R)-2-hydroxy-2-(8-hydroxy-2-oxo-1,2-dihydroquinolin-5-yl)ethylamino]nonyl}piperidin-4-yl     ester; and -   (2-thiophen-2-ylphenyl)carbamic acid     1-[2-(4-{4-[(R)-2-hydroxy-2-(8-hydroxy-2-oxo-1,2-dihydroquinolin-5-yl)ethylamino]butyl}phenyl)ethyl]piperidin-4-yl     ester.

DEFINITIONS

When describing the compounds, compositions, methods and processes of this invention, the following terms have the following meanings unless otherwise indicated.

The term “alkyl” means a monovalent saturated hydrocarbon group which may be linear or branched. Unless otherwise defined, such alkyl groups typically contain from 1 to 10 carbon atoms. Representative alkyl groups include, by way of example, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, sec-butyl, isobutyl, tert-butyl, n-pentyl, n-hexyl, n-heptyl, n-octyl, n-nonyl, n-decyl and the like.

The term “alkylene” means a divalent saturated hydrocarbon group which may be linear or branched. Unless otherwise defined, such alkylene groups typically contain from 1 to 10 carbon atoms. Representative alkylene groups include, by way of example, methylene, ethane-1,2-diyl (“ethylene”), propane-1,2-diyl, propane-1,3-diyl, butane-1,4-diyl, pentane-1,5-diyl and the like.

The term “alkoxy” means a monovalent group of the formula (alkyl)-O—, where alkyl is as defined herein. Representative alkoxy groups include, by way of example, methoxy, ethoxy, n-propoxy, isopropoxy, n-butoxy, sec-butoxy, isobutoxy, tert-butoxy and the like.

The term “alkenyl” means a monovalent unsaturated hydrocarbon group which may be linear or branched and which has at least one, and typically 1, 2 or 3, carbon-carbon double bonds. Unless otherwise defined, such alkenyl groups typically contain from 2 to 10 carbon atoms. Representative alkenyl groups include, by way of example, ethenyl, n-propenyl, isopropenyl, n-but-2-enyl, n-hex-3-enyl and the like. The term “alkenylene” means a divalent alkenyl group.

The term “alkynyl” means a monovalent unsaturated hydrocarbon group which may be linear or branched and which has at least one, and typically 1, 2 or 3, carbon-carbon triple bonds. Unless otherwise defined, such alkynyl groups typically contain from 2 to 10 carbon atoms. Representative alkynyl groups include, by way of example, ethynyl, n-propynyl, n-but-2-ynyl, n-hex-3-ynyl and the like. The term “alkynylene” means a divalent alkynyl group.

The term “aryl” means a monovalent aromatic hydrocarbon having a single ring (i.e., phenyl) or fused rings (i.e., naphthalene). Unless otherwise defined, such aryl groups typically contain from 6 to 10 carbon ring atoms. Representative aryl groups include, by way of example, phenyl and naphthalene-1-yl, naphthalene-2-yl, and the like. The term “arylene” means a divalent aryl group.

The term “azacycloalkyl” means a monovalent heterocyclic ring containing one nitrogen atom, i.e., a cycloalkyl group in which one carbon atom has been replaced with a nitrogen atom. Unless otherwise defined, such azacycloalkyl groups typically contain from 2 to 9 carbon atoms. Representative examples of an azacycloalkyl group are pyrrolidinyl and piperidinyl groups. The term “azacycloalkylene” means a divalent azacycloalkyl group. Representative examples of an azacycloalkylene group are pyrrolidinylene and piperidinylene groups.

The term “cycloalkyl” means a monovalent saturated carbocyclic hydrocarbon group. Unless otherwise defined, such cycloalkyl groups typically contain from 3 to 10 carbon atoms. Representative cycloalkyl groups include, by way of example, cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl and the like. The term “cycloalkylene” means a divalent cycloalkyl group.

The term “halo” means fluoro, chloro, bromo and iodo.

The term “heteroaryl” means a monovalent aromatic group having a single ring or two fused rings and containing in the ring at least one heteroatom (typically 1 to 3 heteroatoms) selected from nitrogen, oxygen or sulfur. Unless otherwise defined, such heteroaryl groups typically contain from 5 to 10 total ring atoms. Representative heteroaryl groups include, by way of example, monovalent species of pyrrole, imidazole, thiazole, oxazole, furan, thiophene, triazole, pyrazole, isoxazole, isothiazole, pyridine, pyrazine, pyridazine, pyrimidine, triazine, indole, benzofuran, benzothiophene, benzimidazole, benzthiazole, quinoline, isoquinoline, quinazoline, quinoxaline and the like, where the point of attachment is at any available carbon or nitrogen ring atom. The term “heteroarylene” means a divalent heteroaryl group.

The term “heterocyclyl” or “heterocyclic” means a monovalent saturated or unsaturated (non-aromatic) group having a single ring or multiple condensed rings and containing in the ring at least one heteroatom (typically 1 to 3 heteroatoms) selected from nitrogen, oxygen or sulfur. Unless otherwise defined, such heterocyclic groups typically contain from 2 to 9 total ring carbon atoms. Representative heterocyclic groups include, by way of example, monovalent species of pyrrolidine, imidazolidine, pyrazolidine, piperidine, 1,4-dioxane, morpholine, thiomorpholine, piperazine, 3-pyrroline and the like, where the point of attachment is at any available carbon or nitrogen ring atom. The term “heterocyclene” means a divalent heterocyclyl or heterocyclic group.

When a specific number of carbon atoms is intended for a particular term used herein, the number of carbon atoms is shown in parentheses preceding the term. For example, the term “(1-4C)alkyl” means an alkyl group having from 1 to 4 carbon atoms.

The term “pharmaceutically acceptable salt” means a salt which is acceptable for administration to a patient, such as a mammal (e.g., salts having acceptable mammalian safety for a given dosage regime). Such salts can be derived from pharmaceutically acceptable inorganic or organic bases and from pharmaceutically acceptable inorganic or organic acids. Salts derived from pharmaceutically acceptable inorganic bases include ammonium, calcium, copper, ferric, ferrous, lithium, magnesium, manganic, manganous, potassium, sodium, zinc and the like. Salts derived from pharmaceutically acceptable organic bases include salts of primary, secondary and tertiary amines, including substituted amines, cyclic amines, naturally-occurring amines and the like, such as arginine, betaine, caffeine, choline, N,N′-dibenzylethylenediamine, diethylamine, 2-diethylaminoethanol, 2-dimethylaminoethanol, ethanolamine, ethylenediamine, N-ethylmorpholine, N-ethylpiperidine, glucamine, glucosamine, histidine, hydrabamine, isopropylamine, lysine, methylglucamine, morpholine, piperazine, piperadine, polyamine resins, procaine, purines, theobromine, triethylamine, trimethylamine, tripropylamine, tromethamine and the like. Salts derived from pharmaceutically acceptable acids include acetic, ascorbic, benzenesulfonic, benzoic, camphosulfonic, citric, ethanesulfonic, edisylic, fumaric, gentisic, gluconic, glucoronic, glutamic, hippuric, hydrobromic, hydrochloric, isethionic, lactic, lactobionic, maleic, malic, mandelic, methanesulfonic, mucic, naphthalenesulfonic, naphthalene-1,5-disulfonic, naphthalene-2,6-disulfonic, nicotinic, nitric, orotic, pamoic, pantothenic, phosphoric, succinic, sulfuric, tartaric, p-toluenesulfonic, xinafoic and the like.

The term “salt thereof” means a compound formed when the hydrogen of an acid is replaced by a cation, such as a metal cation or an organic cation and the like. Preferably, the salt is a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, although this is not required for salts of intermediate compounds that are not intended for administration to a patient.

The term “solvate” means a complex or aggregate formed by one or more molecules of a solute, i.e. a compound of formula I or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, and one or more molecules of a solvent. Such solvates are typically crystalline solids having a substantially fixed molar ratio of solute and solvent. Representative solvents include, by way of example, water, methanol, ethanol, isopropanol, acetic acid and the like. When the solvent is water, the solvate formed is a hydrate.

It will be appreciated that the term “or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate or stereoisomer thereof” is intended to include all permutations of salts, solvates and stereoisomers, such as a solvate of a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of a stereoisomer of a compound of formula I.

The term “therapeutically effective amount” means an amount sufficient to effect treatment when administered to a patient in need of treatment.

The term “treating” or “treatment” as used herein means the treating or treatment of a disease or medical condition (such as COPD) in a patient, such as a mammal (particularly a human) that includes:

-   -   (a) preventing the disease or medical condition from occurring,         i.e., prophylactic treatment of a patient;     -   (b) ameliorating the disease or medical condition, i.e.,         eliminating or causing regression of the disease or medical         condition in a patient;     -   (c) suppressing the disease or medical condition, i.e., slowing         or arresting the development of the disease or medical condition         in a patient; or     -   (d) alleviating the symptoms of the disease or medical condition         in a patient.

The term “leaving group” means a functional group or atom which can be displaced by another functional group or atom in a substitution reaction, such as a nucleophilic substitution reaction. By way of example, representative leaving groups include chloro, bromo and iodo groups; sulfonic ester groups, such as mesylate, tosylate, brosylate, nosylate and the like; and acyloxy groups, such as acetoxy, trifluoroacetoxy and the like.

The term “protected derivatives thereof” means a derivative of the specified compound in which one or more functional groups of the compound are protected from undesired reactions with a protecting or blocking group. Functional groups which may be protected include, by way of example, carboxylic acid groups, amino groups, hydroxyl groups, thiol groups, carbonyl groups and the like. Representative protecting groups for carboxylic acids include esters (such as a p-methoxybenzyl ester), amides and hydrazides; for amino groups, carbamates (such as tert-butoxycarbonyl) and amides; for hydroxyl groups, ethers and esters; for thiol groups, thioethers and thioesters; for carbonyl groups, acetals and ketals; and the like. Such protecting groups are well-known to those skilled in the art and are described, for example, in T. W. Greene and G. M. Wuts, Protecting Groups in Organic Synthesis, Third Edition, Wiley, New York, 1999, and references cited therein.

The term “amino-protecting group” means a protecting group suitable for preventing undesired reactions at an amino group. Representative amino-protecting groups include, but are not limited to, tert-butoxycarbonyl (BOC), trityl (Tr), benzyloxycarbonyl (Cbz), 9-fluorenylmethoxycarbonyl (Fmoc), formyl, trimethylsilyl (TMS), tert-butyldimethylsilyl (TBS), and the like.

The term “carboxy-protecting group” means a protecting group suitable for preventing undesired reactions at a carboxy group. Representative carboxy-protecting groups include, but are not limited to, esters, such as methyl, ethyl, tert-butyl, benzyl (Bn), p-methoxybenzyl (PMB), 9-fluorenylmethyl (Fm), trimethylsilyl (TMS), tert-butyldimethylsilyl (TBS), diphenylmethyl (benzhydryl, DPM) and the like.

The term “hydroxyl-protecting group” means a protecting group suitable for preventing undesirable reactions at a hydroxyl group. Representative hydroxyl-protecting groups include, but are not limited to, silyl groups including tri(1-6C)alkylsilyl groups, such as trimethylsilyl (TMS), triethylsilyl (TES), tert-butyldimethylsilyl (TBS) and the like; esters (acyl groups) including (1-6C)alkanoyl groups, such as formyl, acetyl and the like; arylmethyl groups, such as benzyl (Bn), p-methoxybenzyl (PMB), 9-fluorenylmethyl (Fm), diphenylmethyl (benzhydryl, DPM) and the like. Additionally, two hydroxyl groups can also be protected as an alkylidene group, such as prop-2-ylidine, formed, for example, by reaction with a ketone, such as acetone.

General Synthetic Procedures

The compounds of this invention can be prepared from readily available starting materials using the following general methods and procedures or by using other information readily available to those of ordinary skill in the art. Although a particular embodiment of the present invention may be shown or described herein, those skilled in the art will recognize that all embodiments or aspects of the present invention can be prepared using the methods described herein or by using other methods, reagents and starting materials known to those skilled in the art. It will also be appreciated that where typical or preferred process conditions (i.e., reaction temperatures, times, mole ratios of reactants, solvents, pressures, etc.) are given, other process conditions can also be used unless otherwise stated. While the optimum reaction conditions may vary depending on the particular reactants or solvent used, such conditions can be readily determined by one skilled in the art by routine optimization procedures.

Additionally, as will be apparent to those skilled in the art, conventional protecting groups may be necessary or desired to prevent certain functional groups from undergoing undesired reactions. The choice of a suitable protecting group for a particular functional group as well as suitable conditions for protection and deprotection of such functional groups are well-known in the art. Protecting groups other than those illustrated in the procedures described herein may be used, if desired. For example, numerous protecting groups, and their introduction and removal, are described in T. W. Greene and G. M. Wuts, Protecting Groups in Organic Synthesis, Third Edition, Wiley, New York, 1999, and references cited therein.

By way of illustration, the compounds of this invention can be prepared by a process comprising:

(a) reacting a compound of formula 1:

or a salt thereof; with a compound of formula 2:

wherein X¹ represents a leaving group, and P¹ and P² each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a hydroxyl-protecting group;

(b) reacting a compound of formula 3:

or salt thereof; with a compound of formula 4:

wherein X² represents a leaving group, and P³ and P⁴ each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a hydroxyl-protecting group;

(c) coupling a compound of formula 5:

with a compound of formula 6:

wherein X^(Qa) and X^(Qb) each independently represent functional groups that couple to form a group Q, P^(5a) represents a hydrogen atom or an amino-protecting group; and P^(5b) and P⁶ each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a hydroxyl-protecting group;

(d) for a compound of formula I wherein R⁵ represents a hydrogen atom, reacting a compound of formula 3 with a compound of formula 7:

or a hydrate thereof (e.g., a glyoxal), in the presence of a reducing agent, wherein P⁷ represents a hydrogen atom or a hydroxyl-protecting group;

(e) reacting a compound of formula 1 with a compound of formula 8:

or a hydrate thereof, in the presence of a reducing agent, wherein P⁸ and P⁹ each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a hydroxyl-protecting group, P¹⁰ represents a hydrogen atom or an amino-protecting group, and R^(4′) represents a residue that, together with the carbon to which it is attached, affords a group R⁴ upon completion of the reaction;

(f) reacting a compound of formula 9:

wherein X³ represents a leaving group, with a compound of formula 10:

wherein P¹¹ and P¹² each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a hydroxyl-protecting group, and P¹³ represents a hydrogen atom or an amino-protecting group; or

(g) reacting a compound of formula 11:

or a hydrate thereof; wherein R^(4′) represents a residue that, together with the carbon to which it is attached, affords a group R⁴ upon completion of the reaction; with a compound of formula 10 in the presence of a reducing agent;

(h) reacting a compound of formula 12:

wherein Y¹ represents chloro, bromo, iodo or CF₃SO₂O—, P¹⁴ represents a hydrogen atom or an amino-protecting group; and P¹⁵ and P¹⁶ each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a hydroxyl-protecting group; with a compound of the formula: R¹—B(OH)₂ in the presence of a coupling catalyst; and then

removing any protecting group P¹, P², P³, P⁴, P^(5a), P^(5b), P⁶, P⁷, P⁸, P⁹, P¹⁰, P¹¹, P¹², P¹³, P¹⁴, P¹⁵ and P¹⁶ to provide a compound of formula I; and optionally, forming a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

Generally, if a salt of one of the starting materials is used in the processes described above, such as an acid addition salt, the salt is typically neutralized before or during the reaction process. This neutralization reaction is typically accomplished by contacting the salt with one molar equivalent of a base for each molar equivalent of acid addition salt.

In process (a), i.e., the reaction between the compounds of formula 1 and 2, the leaving group represented by X¹ can be, for example, halo, such as chloro, bromo or iodo, or a sulfonic ester group, such as mesylate or tosylate. The groups P¹ and P² can be, for example, trimethylsilyl and benzyl, respectively. This reaction is typically conducted in an inert diluent, such as acetonitrile, in the presence of a base. For example, this reaction can be conducted in the presence of a tertiary amine, such as diisopropylethylamine. Generally, this reaction is conducted at a temperature in the range of from 0° C. to 100° C. until the reaction is substantially complete. The reaction product is then isolated using conventional procedures, such as extraction, recrystallization, chromatography and the like.

Compounds of formula 1 are generally known in the art or can be prepared from commercially available starting materials and reagents using well-known procedures. For example, compounds of formula 1 can be prepared by reacting an isocyanate compound of formula 13:

with a compound of formula 14:

wherein P¹⁷ represents an amino-protecting group, such as a benzyl group; followed by removal of the protecting group P¹⁷ to afford a compound of formula 1. For example, when P¹⁷ is a benzyl group, the benzyl group is removed by hydrogenolysis, for example, using hydrogen and a group VIII metal catalyst, such as palladium on carbon. When W represents NW^(a), the hydrogenolysis reaction is conveniently performed using Pearlman's catalyst (i.e., Pd(OH)₂).

Compounds of formula 2 can be prepared by various procedures described herein or by procedures that are well-known to those skilled in the art. For example, the hydroxyl group of a compound of formula 22 below, can be readily converted into a leaving group using well-known reagents and procedures. By way of illustration, a hydroxyl group can be converted into a halo group using an inorganic acid halide, such as thionyl chloride, phosphorous trichloride, phosphorous tribromide, phosphorous oxychloride and the like, or a halogen acid, such a hydrogen bromide.

In process (b), i.e., the reaction of a compound of formula 3 with a compound of formula 4, the leaving represented by X² can be, for example, halo, such as chloro, bromo or iodo, or a sulfonic ester group, such as mesylate or tosylate. The groups P³ and P⁴ can be, for example, tert-butyldimethylsilyl and benzyl, respectively. This reaction is typically conducted in the presence of a base, such as sodium bicarbonate, and an alkali metal iodide, such as sodium iodide. Generally, this reaction is conducted in an inert diluent, such as tetrahydrofuran, at a temperature ranging from 25° C. to 100° C. until the reaction is substantially complete. The reaction product is then isolated using conventional procedures, such as extraction, recrystallization, chromatography and the like.

Compounds of formula 3 can be prepared by reacting a compound of formula 1 with a compound of formula 15:

X⁴—R⁴—NP¹⁸P¹⁹  15

wherein X⁴ represents a leaving group such as halo, such as chloro, bromo or iodo, or sulfonic ester group, such as mesylate or tosylate. This reaction is typically conducted by contacting a compound of formula 1 with a compound of formula 15 in an inert diluent, such as acetonitrile, DMF or mixtures thereof, at a temperature ranging from about 0° C. to about 100° C. until the reaction is substantially complete. Subsequent removal of the protecting groups, P¹⁸ and P¹⁹, affords a compound of formula 3. For example, when P¹⁸ is tert-butoxycarbonyl group and P¹⁹ is hydrogen, the tert-butoxycarbonyl group can be removed by treating the protected compound with trifluoroacetic acid.

Alternatively, compounds of formula 3 can be obtained by reductive amination of a compound of formula 11. The reductive amination can be performed by reacting the compound of formula 11 with, for example, benzylamine and hydrogen in the presence of palladium on carbon.

Compounds of formula 11 may be prepared by oxidizing the corresponding alcohol of formula 16:

using a suitable oxidizing agent, such as sulfur trioxide pyridine complex and dimethyl sulfoxide. This oxidation reaction is typically conducted in an inert diluent, such as dichloromethane, the presence of a tertiary amine, such as diisopropylethylamine, at a temperature ranging from about −20° C. to about 25° C.

Compounds of formula 16 can be prepared by reacting a compound of formula 1 with a compound of formula 17:

X⁵—R⁴—OH  17

wherein X⁵ represents a leaving group such as halo, such as chloro, bromo or iodo, or a sulfonic ester group, such as mesylate or tosylate.

Compounds of formula 4 can be prepared by reacting a compound of formula 18:

with a reducing agent, such as borane. If desired, such a reduction can be performed in the presence of a chiral catalyst to provide compounds of formula 4 in chiral form. For example, compounds of formula 18 can be reduced in the presence of a chiral catalyst formed from (R)-(+)-α,α-diphenyl-2-pyrrolidinemethanol and trimethylboroxine; or alternatively, from (S)-(−)-α,α-diphenyl-2-pyrrolidinemethanol and trimethylboroxine. The resulting hydroxyl group can then be protected with a hydroxyl-protecting group, P³, by reaction with, for example, tert-butyldimethylsilyl trifluoromethanesulfonate.

Compounds of formula 18 in which X² represents a bromine atom can be prepared by reacting a compound of formula 19:

with bromine in the presence of a Lewis acid, such as boron trifluoride diethyl etherate. Compounds of formula 19 are well-known in the art or can be prepared by well-known procedures using commercially available starting materials and reagents.

Referring to process (c), i.e., the reaction of a compound of formula 5 with a compound of formula 6, it will be appreciated that the groups X^(Qa) and X^(Qb) should be selected so as to afford the desired group Q upon completion of the reaction. For example, when the desired group Q is an amide group, i.e., —N(Q^(a))C(O)— or —C(O)N(Q^(b)), one of X^(Qa) and X^(Qb) can be an amine group (i.e., —NHQ^(a) or —NHQ^(b)) and the other can be a carboxyl group (i.e., —COOH) or a reactive derivative thereof (such as acyl halide, such as an acyl chloride or acyl bromide). The groups P^(5a), P^(5b) and P⁶ can be, for example, benzyl, trimethylsilyl and benzyl, respectively. When Q is an amide group, the reaction can be performed under conventional amide coupling conditions. Similarly, when the desired group Q is a sulfonamide, i.e., —N(Q^(c))S(O)₂— or —S(O)₂N(Q^(d))-, one of X^(Qa) and X^(Qb) can be an amine group, —NHQ^(c) or —NHQ^(d) and the other can be a sulfonyl halide group (such as sulfonyl chloride or sulfonyl bromide).

Compounds of formula 5 can be prepared by reacting a compound of formula 1 with a compound of formula 20:

X⁶—(R^(4a))_(d)-(A¹)_(c)-(R_(4b))_(f)—X^(Qa′)  20

wherein X⁶ represents a leaving group including halo, such as chloro, bromo or iodo, and a sulfonic ester group, such as mesylate or tosylate; and X^(Qa′) represents X^(Qa), such as a carboxyl group or an amino group NHQ^(a), or a protected derivative thereof, such as a (1-6C)alkoxycarbonylamino group or a tert-butoxycarbonylamino group. This reaction is typically conducted by a method analogous to that used to prepare compounds of formula 3, followed by removing any protecting group in X^(Qa′).

Compounds of formula 6 can be prepared by reacting a compound of formula 10 with a compound of formula 21:

X^(Qb′)—(R^(4c))_(g)-(A²)_(h)-(R^(4d))_(i)—X⁷  21

wherein X⁷ represents a leaving group including halo, such as chloro, bromo or iodo, and a sulfonic ester group, such as mesylate or tosylate; and X^(Qb′) represents X^(Qb), such as a carboxyl group or an amino group NHQ^(b), or a protected derivative thereof, such as a (1-6C)alkoxycarbonyl group or a tert-butoxycarbonylamino group. This reaction is typically conducted by a method analogous to that used to prepare compounds of formula 3 followed by removing any protecting group in X^(Qb′).

Referring to process (d), i.e., the reaction of a compound of formula 3 with a compound of formula 7, any suitable reducing agent may be used in this reaction. For example, the reducing agent can be hydrogen in the presence of a Group VIII metal catalyst, such as palladium on carbon; or a metal hydride reagent, such as sodium triacetoxyborohydride. The group P⁷ can be, for example, benzyl. This reaction is typically conducted in an inert diluent and a protic solvent, such as a mixture of dichloroethane and methanol, at a temperature in the range of from 0° C. to 100° C. until the reaction is substantially complete.

Compounds of formula 7 in the form of a hydrate can be prepared by conventional procedures, for example, by dibrominating a compound of formula 19, and then hydrolyzing the resulting dibromide to form a glyoxal or a hydrate thereof. For example, a compound of formula 19 can be reacted with hydrogen bromide and then hydrolyzed with water to form the corresponding glyoxal hydrate.

Referring to process (e), i.e., the reaction of a compound of formula I with a compound of formula 8, any suitable reducing agent may be used in this reaction. For example, the reducing agent may be hydrogen in the presence of a Group VIII metal catalyst, such as palladium on carbon; or a metal hydride reagent, such as sodium triacetoxyborohydride. The groups P⁸, P⁹ and P¹⁰ can be, for example, trimethylsilyl, benzyl and benzyl, respectively. Typically, this reduction reaction is conducted in an inert diluent and a protic solvent, such as dichloroethane and methanol, at a temperature in the range of from 0° C. to 100° C. until the reaction is substantially complete.

Compounds of formula 8 may be prepared by oxidizing a compound of formula 22:

using any suitable oxidizing agent, such as sulfur trioxide pyridine complex and dimethyl sulfoxide. This reaction is typically conducted in the presence of a tertiary amine, such as diisopropylethylamine, at a temperature in the range of from about −20° C. to about 25° C. until the oxidation is substantially complete.

Compounds of formula 22 can be prepared by reacting a compound of formula 10 with a compound of formula 23:

HO—R⁴—X⁸  23

wherein X⁸ represents a leaving group including halo, such as chloro, bromo or iodo, and a sulfonic ester group, such as mesylate or tosylate.

Referring to process (f), i.e., the reaction of a compound of formula 9 with a compound of formula 10, the leaving group represented by X³ can be, for example, halo, such as chloro, bromo or iodo, or a sulfonic ester group, such as mesylate or tosylate. The groups P¹¹, P¹² and P¹³ can be, for example, trimethylsilyl, benzyl and benzyl, respectively. This reaction is typically conducted an inert diluent, such as acetonitrile, in the presence of a suitable base. For example, this reaction can be conducted in the presence of a tertiary amine, such as diisopropylethylamine. Generally, this reaction is conducted at a temperature in the range of from 0° C. to 100° C. until the reaction is substantially complete.

Compounds of formula 9 can be prepared by steps analogous to those of methods (a) to (e) herein, starting from a compound of formula 1. Additionally, compounds of formula 10 can be prepared from compounds of formula 4 by reaction with an amine of formula P¹³NH₂.

Referring to process (g), i.e., the reaction of a compound of formula 11 with a compound of formula 10, any suitable reducing agent may be used in this reaction. For example, the reducing agent may be hydrogen in the presence of a Group VIII metal catalyst, such as palladium on carbon; or a metal hydride reagent, such as sodium triacetoxyborohydride. The groups P¹¹, P¹² and P¹³ can be, for example, tert-butyldimethylsilyl, benzyl and benzyl, respectively. Typically, this reduction reaction is conducted in an inert diluent and a protic solvent, such as dichloroethane and methanol, at a temperature in the range of from 0° C. to 100° C. until the reaction is substantially complete.

Compounds of formula 11 are readily prepared by oxidation of the corresponding alcohol or by hydrolysis of the corresponding acetal. Any suitable oxidizing agent may be employed in this reaction to provide the aldehyde, such as sulfur trioxide pyridine complex and dimethyl sulfoxide. The acetal may be hydrolyzed under conventional conditions using aqueous acid to provide the aldehyde.

Referring to process (h), i.e., the reaction of a compound of formula 12 with a boronic acid compound of formula R¹—B(OH)₂, any suitable coupling catalyst can be used to couple 12 with the boronic acid derivative using Suzuki coupling reaction conditions. For example, representative catalysts include palladium and nickel catalysts, such as [1,1′-bis(diphenylphosphino)ferrocene]dichloropalladium(II), bis[1,2-bis(diphenylphosphino)propane]palladium(0), palladium(II) acetate, [1,1′-bis(diphenylphosphino)ferrocene]dichloronickel(II) and the like. Optionally, a base is employed in this reaction, such as sodium carbonate, sodium bicarbonate, potassium phosphate, triethylamine and the like. Generally, compounds of formula 12 in which Y¹ represents bromo, iodo or CF₃SO₂O— (i.e., triflate) are more reactive in the coupling reaction and therefore, such compounds are typically preferred. Particularly useful compounds of formula 12 are those in which Y¹ is bromo. In the compounds of formula 12, P¹⁴, P¹⁵ and P¹⁶ can be any suitable amino- and hydroxyl-protecting groups, such as benzyl, tert-butyldimethylsilyl and benzyl, respectively.

The boronic acid compounds employed in process (h) are either commercially available or can be prepared from commercially available starting materials and reagents using procedures well known to those skilled in the art. For example, boronic acid derivatives can be prepared by reacting the corresponding lithium derivative with a trialkyl borate, such as triisopropyl borate, and then hydrolyzing the resulting product to provide the boronic acid derivative.

Those skilled in the art will appreciate that the Suzuki coupling reaction can be conducted at any suitable step of the synthetic process. For example, the Suzuki coupling reaction can be conducted as the final step of the synthetic process after the remaining portions of the compound have been prepared. Alternatively, the Suzuki coupling reaction can be conducted earlier in the synthetic process to prepare intermediates having the desired biaryl ring system. Additionally, the boronic acid moiety may be present on the compound of formula 12, i.e., where Y¹ in 12 is —B(OH)₂; and this compound may be coupled to a compound of the formula: R¹—Y², where Y² represents chloro, bromo, iodo or CF₃SO₂O—.

Compounds of formula I in which R⁶ and R⁷ together form —NR^(7g)C(O)—CR^(7b)R^(7i)—CR^(7j)R^(7k)— or —CR^(7l)R^(7m)—CR^(7n)R^(7o)—C(O)—NR^(7p)— may be prepared by reducing a corresponding compound of formula I in which R⁶ and R⁷ together form —NR^(7a)C(O)—CR^(7b)═CR^(7c)— or —CR^(7d)═CR^(7c)—C(O)—NR^(7f)—. For example, such compounds can be reduced by catalytic hydrogenation in the presence of a suitable hydrogenation catalyst.

Further details regarding specific reaction conditions and other procedures for preparing representative compounds of this invention or intermediates thereof are described in the Examples set forth below.

Pharmaceutical Compositions and Formulations

The compounds of this invention are typically administered to a patient in the form of a pharmaceutical composition or formulation. Such pharmaceutical compositions may be administered to the patient by any acceptable route of administration including, but not limited to, inhaled, oral, nasal, topical (including transdermal) and parenteral modes of administration. It will be understood that any form of the compounds of this invention, (i.e., free base, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, etc.) that is suitable for the particular mode of administration can be used in the pharmaceutical compositions discussed herein.

Accordingly, in one of its compositions aspects, this invention is directed to a pharmaceutical composition comprising a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or excipient and a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of formula I, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. Optionally, such pharmaceutical compositions may contain other therapeutic and/or formulating agents if desired.

The pharmaceutical compositions of this invention typically contain a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of the present invention or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. Typically, such pharmaceutical compositions will contain from about 0.01 to about 95% by weight of the active agent; including, from about 0.01 to about 30% by weight; such as from about 0.01 to about 10% by weight of the active agent.

Any conventional carrier or excipient may be used in the pharmaceutical compositions of this invention. The choice of a particular carrier or excipient, or combinations of carriers or exipients, will depend on the mode of administration being used to treat a particular patient or type of medical condition or disease state. In this regard, the preparation of a suitable pharmaceutical composition for a particular mode of administration is well within the scope of those skilled in the pharmaceutical arts. Additionally, the ingredients for such compositions are commercially available from, for example, Sigma, P.O. Box 14508, St. Louis, Mo. 63178. By way of further illustration, conventional formulation techniques are described in Remington: The Science and Practice of Pharmacy, 20^(th) Edition, Lippincott Williams & White, Baltimore, Md. (2000); and H. C. Ansel et al., Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms and Drug Delivery Systems, 7^(th) Edition, Lippincott Williams & White, Baltimore, Md. (1999).

Representative examples of materials which can serve as pharmaceutically acceptable carriers include, but are not limited to, the following: (1) sugars, such as lactose, glucose and sucrose; (2) starches, such as corn starch and potato starch; (3) cellulose, and its derivatives, such as sodium carboxymethyl cellulose, ethyl cellulose and cellulose acetate; (4) powdered tragacanth; (5) malt; (6) gelatin; (7) talc; (8) excipients, such as cocoa butter and suppository waxes; (9) oils, such as peanut oil, cottonseed oil, safflower oil, sesame oil, olive oil, corn oil and soybean oil; (10) glycols, such as propylene glycol; (11) polyols, such as glycerin, sorbitol, mannitol and polyethylene glycol; (12) esters, such as ethyl oleate and ethyl laurate; (13) agar; (14) buffering agents, such as magnesium hydroxide and aluminum hydroxide; (15) alginic acid; (16) pyrogen-free water; (17) isotonic saline; (18) Ringer's solution; (19) ethyl alcohol; (20) phosphate buffer solutions; (21) compressed propellant gases, such as chlorofluorocarbons and hydrofluorocarbons; and (22) other non-toxic compatible substances employed in pharmaceutical compositions.

The pharmaceutical compositions of this invention are typically prepared by thoroughly and intimately mixing or blending a compound of the invention with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and one or more optional ingredients. If necessary or desired, the resulting uniformly blended mixture can then be shaped or loaded into tablets, capsules, pills, canisters, cartridges, dispensers and the like using conventional procedures and equipment.

In one embodiment, the pharmaceutical compositions of this invention are suitable for inhaled administration. Suitable pharmaceutical compositions for inhaled administration will typically be in the form of an aerosol or a powder. Such compositions are generally administered using well-known delivery devices, such as a nebulizer inhaler, a metered-dose inhaler (MDI), a dry powder inhaler (DPI) or a similar delivery device.

In a specific embodiment of this invention, the pharmaceutical composition comprising the active agent is administered by inhalation using a nebulizer inhaler. Such nebulizer devices typically produce a stream of high velocity air that causes the pharmaceutical composition comprising the active agent to spray as a mist that is carried into the patient's respiratory tract. Accordingly, when formulated for use in a nebulizer inhaler, the active agent is typically dissolved in a suitable carrier to form a solution. Alternatively, the active agent can be micronized and combined with a suitable carrier to form a suspension of micronized particles of respirable size, where micronized is typically defined as having about 90% or more of the particles with a diameter of less than about 10 μm. Suitable nebulizer devices are provided commercially, for example, by PARI GmbH (Starnberg, German). Other nebulizer devices include Respimat (Boehringer Ingelheim) and those disclosed, for example, in U.S. Pat. No. 6,123,068 and WO 97/12687.

A representative pharmaceutical composition for use in a nebulizer inhaler comprises an isotonic aqueous solution comprising from about 0.05 μg/mL to about 10 mg/mL of a compound of formula I or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate or stereoisomer thereof.

In another specific embodiment of this invention, the pharmaceutical composition comprising the active agent is administered by inhalation using a dry powder inhaler. Such dry powder inhalers typically administer the active agent as a free-flowing powder that is dispersed in a patient's air-stream during inspiration. In order to achieve a free-flowing powder, the active agent is typically formulated with a suitable excipient such as lactose or starch.

A representative pharmaceutical composition for use in a dry powder inhaler comprises dry lactose having a particle size between about 1 μm and about 100 μm and micronized particles of a compound of formula I, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate or stereoisomer thereof.

Such a dry powder formulation can be made, for example, by combining the lactose with the active agent and then dry blending the components. Alternatively, if desired, the active agent can be formulated without an excipient. The pharmaceutical composition is then typically loaded into a dry powder dispenser, or into inhalation cartridges or capsules for use with a dry powder delivery device.

Examples of dry powder inhaler delivery devices include Diskhaler (GlaxoSmithKline, Research Triangle Park, N.C.) (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 5,035,237); Diskus (GlaxoSmithKline) (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 6,378,519; Turbuhaler (AstraZeneca, Wilmington, Del.) (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 4,524,769); Rotahaler (GlaxoSmithKline) (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 4,353,365) and Handihaler (Boehringer Ingelheim). Further examples of suitable DPI devices are described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,415,162, 5,239,993, and 5,715,810 and references cited therein.

In yet another specific embodiment of this invention, the pharmaceutical composition comprising the active agent is administered by inhalation using a metered-dose inhaler. Such metered-dose inhalers typically discharge a measured amount of the active agent or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof using compressed. propellant gas. Accordingly, pharmaceutical compositions administered using a metered-dose inhaler typically comprise a solution or suspension of the active agent in a liquefied propellant. Any suitable liquefied propellant may be employed including chlorofluorocarbons, such as CCl₃F, and hydrofluoroalkanes (HFAs), such as 1,1,1,2-tetrafluoroethane (HFA 134a) and 1,1,1,2,3,3,3-heptafluoro-n-propane, (HFA 227). Due to concerns about chlorofluorocarbons affecting the ozone layer, formulations containing HFAs are generally preferred. Additional optional components of HFA formulations include co-solvents, such as ethanol or pentane, and surfactants, such as sorbitan trioleate, oleic acid, lecithin, and glycerin. See, for example, U.S. Pat. No. 5,225,183, EP 0717987 A2, and WO 92/22286.

A representative pharmaceutical composition for use in a metered-dose inhaler comprises from about 0.01% to about 5% by weight of a compound of formula I, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate or stereoisomer thereof; from about 0% to about 20% by weight ethanol; and from about 0% to about 5% by weight surfactant; with the remainder being an HFA propellant.

Such compositions are typically prepared by adding chilled or pressurized hydrofluroalkane to a suitable container containing the active agent, ethanol (if present) and the surfactant (if present). To prepare a suspension, the active agent is micronized and then combined with the propellant. The formulation is then loaded into an aerosol canister, which forms a portion of a metered-dose inhaler device. Examples of metered-dose inhaler devices developed specifically for use with HFA propellants are provided in U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,006,745 and 6,143,277. Alternatively, a suspension formulation can be prepared by spray drying a coating of surfactant on micronized particles of the active agent. See, for example, WO 99/53901 and WO 00/61108.

For additional examples of processes of preparing respirable particles, and formulations and devices suitable for inhalation dosing see U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,268,533, 5,983,956, 5,874,063, and 6,221,398, and WO 99/55319 and WO 00/30614.

In another embodiment, the pharmaceutical compositions of this invention are suitable for oral administration. Suitable pharmaceutical compositions for oral administration may be in the form of capsules, tablets, pills, lozenges, cachets, dragees, powders, granules; or as a solution or a suspension in an aqueous or non-aqueous liquid; or as an oil-in-water or water-in-oil liquid emulsion; or as an elixir or syrup; and the like; each containing a predetermined amount of a compound of the present invention as an active ingredient.

When intended for oral administration in a solid dosage form (i.e., as capsules, tablets, pills and the like), the pharmaceutical compositions of this invention will typically comprise a compound of the present invention as the active ingredient and one or more pharmaceutically acceptable carriers, such as sodium citrate or dicalcium phosphate. Optionally or alternatively, such solid dosage forms may also comprise: (1) fillers or extenders, such as starches, lactose, sucrose, glucose, mannitol, and/or silicic acid; (2) binders, such as carboxymethylcellulose, alginates, gelatin, polyvinyl pyrrolidone, sucrose and/or acacia; (3) humectants, such as glycerol; (4) disintegrating agents, such as agar-agar, calcium carbonate, potato or tapioca starch, alginic acid, certain silicates, and/or sodium carbonate; (5) solution retarding agents, such as paraffin; (6) absorption accelerators, such as quaternary ammonium compounds; (7) wetting agents, such as cetyl alcohol and/or glycerol monostearate; (8) absorbents, such as kaolin and/or bentonite clay; (9) lubricants, such as talc, calcium stearate, magnesium stearate, solid polyethylene glycols, sodium lauryl sulfate, and/or mixtures thereof; (10) coloring agents; and (11) buffering agents.

Release agents, wetting agents, coating agents, sweetening, flavoring and perfuming agents, preservatives and antioxidants can also be present in the pharmaceutical compositions of this invention. Examples of pharmaceutically acceptable antioxidants include: (1) water-soluble antioxidants, such as ascorbic acid, cysteine hydrochloride, sodium bisulfate, sodium metabisulfite sodium sulfite and the like; (2) oil-soluble antioxidants, such as ascorbyl palmitate, butylated hydroxyanisole (BHA), butylated hydroxytoluene (BHT), lecithin, propyl gallate, alpha-tocopherol, and the like; and (3) metal-chelating agents, such as citric acid, ethylendiamine tetraacetic acid (EDTA), sorbitol, tartaric acid, phosphoric acid, and the like. Coating agents for tablets, capsules, pills and like, include those used for enteric coatings, such as cellulose acetate phthalate (CAP), polyvinyl acetate phthalate (PVAP), hydroxypropyl methylcellulose phthalate, methacrylic acid-methacrylic acid ester copolymers, cellulose acetate trimellitate (CAT), carboxymethyl ethyl cellulose (CMEC), hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose acetate succinate (HPMCAS), and the like.

If desired, the pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention may also be formulated to provide slow or controlled release of the active ingredient using, by way of example, hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose in varying proportions; or other polymer matrices, liposomes and/or microspheres.

In addition, the pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention may optionally contain opacifying agents and may be formulated so that they release the active ingredient only, or preferentially, in a certain portion of the gastrointestinal tract, optionally, in a delayed manner. Examples of embedding compositions which can be used include polymeric substances and waxes. The active ingredient can also be in micro-encapsulated form, if appropriate, with one or more of the above-described excipients.

Suitable liquid dosage forms for oral administration include, by way of illustration, pharmaceutically acceptable emulsions, microemulsions, solutions, suspensions, syrups and elixirs. Such liquid dosage forms typically comprise the active ingredient and an inert diluent, such as, for example, water or other solvents, solubilizing agents and emulsifiers, such as ethyl alcohol, isopropyl alcohol, ethyl carbonate, ethyl acetate, benzyl alcohol, benzyl benzoate, propylene glycol, 1,3-butylene glycol, oils (esp., cottonseed, groundnut, corn, germ, olive, castor and sesame oils), glycerol, tetrahydrofuryl alcohol, polyethylene glycols and fatty acid esters of sorbitan, and mixtures thereof. Suspensions, in addition to the active ingredient, may contain suspending agents such as, for example, ethoxylated isostearyl alcohols, polyoxyethylene sorbitol and sorbitan esters, microcrystalline cellulose, aluminium metahydroxide, bentonite, agar-agar and tragacanth, and mixtures thereof.

When intended for oral administration, the pharmaceutical compositions of this invention are preferably packaged in a unit dosage form. The term “unit dosage form” means a physically discrete unit suitable for dosing a patient, i.e., each unit containing a predetermined quantity of active agent calculated to produce the desired therapeutic effect either alone or in combination with one or more additional units. For example, such unit dosage forms may be capsules, tablets, pills, and the like.

The compounds of this invention can also be administered transdermally using known transdermal delivery systems and excipents. For example, a compound of this invention can be admixed with permeation enhancers, such as propylene glycol, polyethylene glycol monolaurate, azacycloalkan-2-ones and the like, and incorporated into a patch or similar delivery system. Additional excipients including gelling agents, emulsifiers and buffers, may be used in such transdermal compositions if desired.

The pharmaceutical compositions of this invention may also contain other therapeutic agents that are co-administered with a compound of formula I, or pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate or stereoisomer thereof. For example, the pharmaceutical compositions of this invention may further comprise one or more therapeutic agents selected from other bronchodilators (e.g., PDE₃ inhibitors, adenosine 2b modulators and O₂ adrenergic receptor agonists); anti-inflammatory agents (e.g. steroidal anti-inflammatory agents, such as corticosteroids; non-steroidal anti-inflammatory agents (NSAIDs), and PDE₄ inhibitors); other muscarinic receptor antagonists (i.e., anticholinergic agents); antiinfective agents (e.g. Gram positive and Gram negative antibiotics or antivirals); antihistamines; protease inhibitors; and afferent blockers (e.g., D₂ agonists and neurokinin modulators). The other therapeutic agents can be used in the form of pharmaceutically acceptable salts or solvates. Additionally, if appropriate, the other therapeutic agents can be used as optically pure stereoisomers.

Representative β₂ adrenergic receptor agonists that can be used in combination with, and in addition to, the compounds of this invention include, but are not limited to, salmeterol, salbutamol, formoterol, salmefamol, fenoterol, terbutaline, albuterol, isoetharine, metaproterenol, bitolterol, pirbuterol, levalbuterol and the like, or pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof. Other β₂ adrenergic receptor agonists that can be used in combination with the compounds of this invention include, but are not limited to, 3-(4-{[6-({(2R)-2-hydroxy-2-[4-hydroxy-3-(hydroxymethyl)-phenyl]ethyl}amino)-hexyl]oxy}butyl)benzenesulfonamide and 3-(-3-{[7-({(2R)-2-hydroxy-2-[4-hydroxy-3-(hydroxymethyl)phenyl]ethyl}amino)heptyl]oxy}propyl)benzenesulfonamide and related compounds disclosed in WO 02/066422, published on Aug. 29, 2002; 3-[3-(4-{[6-([(2R)-2-hydroxy-2-[4-hydroxy-3-(hydroxymethyl)phenyl]ethyl}amino)hexyl]oxy}butyl)-phenyl]imidazolidine-2,4-dione and related compounds disclosed in WO 02/070490, published Sep. 12, 2002; 3-(4-{[6-({(2R)-2-[3-(formylamino)-4-hydroxyphenyl]-2-hydroxyethyl}amino)hexyl]oxy}butyl)-benzenesulfonamide, 3-(4-{[6-({(2S)-2-[3-(formylamino)-4-hydroxyphenyl]-2-hydroxyethyl}amino)hexyl]oxy}butyl)-benzenesulfonamide, 3-(4-{[6-({(2R/S)-2-[3-(formylamino)-4-hydroxyphenyl]-2-hydroxyethyl}amino)hexyl]oxy}butyl)-benzenesulfonamide, N-(tert-butyl)-3-(4-{[6-({(2R)-2-[3-(formylamino)-4-hydroxyphenyl]-2-hydroxyethyl}amino)hexyl]-oxy}butyl)benzenesulfonamide, N-(tert-butyl)-3-(4-{[6-({(2S)-2-[3-(formylamino)-4-hydroxyphenyl]-2-hydroxyethyl}amino)-hexyl]oxy}butyl)-benzenesulfonamide, N-(tert-butyl)-3-(4-{[6-({(2R/S)-2-[3-(formylamino)-4-hydroxyphenyl]-2-hydroxyethyl}amino)hexyl]-oxy}butyl)benzenesulfonamide and related compounds disclosed in WO 02/076933, published on Oct. 3, 2002; 4-{(1R)-2-[(6-{2-[(2,6-dichlorobenzyl)oxy]ethoxy}hexyl)amino]-1-hydroxyethyl}-2-(hydroxymethyl)phenol and related compounds disclosed in WO 03/024439, published on Mar. 27, 2003; and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof. When employed, the β₂-adrenoreceptor agonist will be present in the pharmaceutical composition in a therapeutically effective amount. Typically, the β₂-adrenoreceptor agonist will be present in an amount sufficient to provide from about 0.05 μg to about 500 μg per dose.

Representative steroidal anti-inflammatory agents that can be used in combination with the compounds of this invention include, but are not limited to, methyl prednisolone, prednisolone, dexamethasone, fluticasone propionate, 6,9-difluoro-17-[(2-furanylcarbonyl)oxy]-11-hydroxy-16-methyl-3-oxoandrosta-1,4-diene-17-carbothioic acid S-fluoromethyl ester, 6,9-difluoro-11-hydroxy-16-methyl-3-oxo-17-propionyloxy-androsta-1,4-diene-17-carbothioic acid S-(2-oxo-tetrahydrofuran-3S-yl) ester, beclomethasone esters (e.g. the 17-propionate ester or the 17,21-dipropionate ester), budesonide, flunisolide, mometasone esters (e.g. the furoate ester), triamcinolone acetonide, rofleponide, ciclesonide, butixocort propionate, RPR-106541, ST-126 and the like, or pharmaceutically-acceptable salts thereof. In a particular embodiment, the steroidal anti-inflammatory agent is 6α,9α-difluoro-17α-[(2-furanylcarbonyl)oxy]-11β-hydroxy-16α-methyl-3-oxoandrosta-1,4-diene-17β-carbothioic acid S-fluoromethyl ester or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof. When employed, the steroidal anti-inflammatory agent will be present in the pharmaceutical composition in a therapeutically effective amount. Typically, the steroidal anti-inflammatory agent will be present in an amount sufficient to provide from about 0.05 μg to about 500 μg per dose.

Other suitable combinations include, for example, other anti-inflammatory agents, e.g., NSAIDs (such as sodium cromoglycate; nedocromil sodium; phosphodiesterase (PDE) inhibitors (e.g. theophylline, PDE4 inhibitors or mixed PDE3/PDE4 inhibitors); leukotriene antagonists (e.g. monteleukast); inhibitors of leukotriene synthesis; iNOS inhibitors; protease inhibitors, such as tryptase and elastase inhibitors; beta-2 integrin antagonists and adenosine receptor agonists or antagonists (e.g. adenosine 2a agonists); cytokine antagonists (e.g. chemokine antagonists such as, an interleukin antibody (IL antibody), specifically, an IL-4 therapy, an IL-13 therapy, or a combination thereof); or inhibitors of cytokine synthesis.

For example, representative phosphodiesterase-4 (PDE4) inhibitors or mixed PDE3/PDE4 inhibitors that can be used in combination with the compounds of this invention include, but are not limited to cis 4-cyano-4-(3-cyclopentyloxy-4-methoxyphenyl)cyclohexan-1-carboxylic acid, 2-carbomethoxy-4-cyano-4-(3-cyclopropylmethoxy-4-difluoromethoxyphenyl)cyclohexan-1-one; cis-[4-cyano-4-(3-cyclopropylmethoxy-4-difluoromethoxyphenyl)cyclohexan-1-ol]; cis-4-cyano-4-[3-(cyclopentyloxy)-4-methoxyphenyl]cyclohexane-1-carboxylic acid and the like, or pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof. Other representative PDE4 or mixed PDE4/PDE3 inhibitors include AWD-12-281 (elbion); NCS-613 (INSERM); D-4418 (Chiroscience and Schering-Plough); CI-1018 or PD-168787 (Pfizer); benzodioxole compounds disclosed in WO99/16766 (Kyowa Hakko); K-34 (Kyowa Hakko); V-11294A (Napp); roflumilast (Byk-Gulden); phthalazinone compounds disclosed in WO99/47505 (Byk-Gulden); Pumafentrine (Byk-Gulden, now Altana); arofylline (Almirall-Prodesfarma); VM554/UM565 (Vernalis); T-440 (Tanabe Seiyaku); and T2585 (Tanabe Seiyaku).

Representative muscarinic antagonists (i.e., anticholinergic agents) that can be used in combination with, and in addition to, the compounds of this invention include, but are not limited to, atropine, atropine sulfate, atropine oxide, methylatropine nitrate, homatropine hydrobromide, hyoscyamine (d, l) hydrobromide, scopolamine hydrobromide, ipratropium bromide, oxitropium bromide, tiotropium bromide, methantheline, propantheline bromide, anisotropine methyl bromide, clidinium bromide, copyrrolate (Robinul), isopropamide iodide, mepenzolate bromide, tridihexethyl chloride (Pathilone), hexocyclium methyl sulfate, cyclopentolate hydrochloride, tropicamide, trihexyphenidyl hydrochloride, pirenzepine, telenzepine, AF-DX 116 and methoctramine and the like, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof; or, for those compounds listed as a salt, alternate pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

Representative antihistamines (i.e., H₁-receptor antagonists) that can be used in combination with the compounds of this invention include, but are not limited to, ethanolamines, such as carbinoxamine maleate, clemastine fumarate, diphenylhydramine hydrochloride and dimenhydrinate; ethylenediamines, such as pyrilamine amleate, tripelennamine hydrochloride and tripelennamine citrate; alkylamines, such as chlorpheniramine and acrivastine; piperazines, such as hydroxyzine hydrochloride, hydroxyzine pamoate, cyclizine hydrochloride, cyclizine lactate, meclizine hydrochloride and cetirizine hydrochloride; piperidines, such as astemizole, levocabastine hydrochloride, loratadine or its descarboethoxy analogue, terfenadine and fexofenadine hydrochloride; azelastine hydrochloride; and the like, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof; or, for those compounds listed as a salt, alternate pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

Suitable doses for the other therapeutic agents administered in combination with a compound of the invention are in the range of about 0.05 μg/day to about 100 mg/day.

The following formulations illustrate representative pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention:

Formulation Example A

A dry powder for administration by inhalation is prepared as follows:

Ingredients Amount Compound of the invention 0.2 mg Lactose  25 mg

-   -   Representative Procedure: The compound of the invention is         micronized and then blended with lactose. This blended mixture         is then loaded into a gelatin inhalation cartridge. The contents         of the cartridge are administered using a powder inhaler.

Formulation Example B

A dry powder formulation for use in a dry powder inhalation device is prepared as follows:

Representative Procedure: A pharmaceutical composition is prepared having a bulk formulation ratio of micronized compound of the invention to lactose of 1:200. The composition is packed into a dry powder inhalation device capable of delivering between about 10 μg and about 100 μg of the compound of the invention per dose.

Formulation Example C

A dry powder for administration by inhalation in a metered dose inhaler is prepared as follows:

Representative Procedure: A suspension containing 5 wt. % of a compound of the invention and 0.1 wt. % lecithin is prepared by dispersing 10 g of the compound of the invention as micronized particles with mean size less than 10 μm in a solution formed from 0.2 g of lecithin dissolved in 200 mL of demineralized water. The suspension is spray dried and the resulting material is micronized to particles having a mean diameter less than 1.5 μm. The particles are loaded into cartridges with pressurized 1,1,1,2-tetrafluoroethane.

Formulation Example D

A pharmaceutical composition for use in a metered dose inhaler is prepared as follows:

Representative Procedure: A suspension containing 5 wt. % compound of the invention, 0.5 wt. % lecithin, and 0.5 wt. % trehalose is prepared by dispersing 5 g of active ingredient as micronized particles with mean size less than 10 μm in a colloidal solution formed from 0.5 g of trehalose and 0.5 g of lecithin dissolved in 100 mL of demineralized water. The suspension is spray dried and the resulting material is micronized to particles having a mean diameter less than 1.5 μm. The particles are loaded into canisters with pressurized 1,1,1,2-tetrafluoroethane.

Formulation Example E

A pharmaceutical composition for use in a nebulizer inhaler is prepared as follows:

Representative Procedure: An aqueous aerosol formulation for use in a nebulizer is prepared by dissolving 0.1 mg of the compound of the invention in 1 mL of a 0.9% sodium chloride solution acidified with citric acid. The mixture is stirred and sonicated until the active ingredient is dissolved. The pH of the solution is adjusted to a value in the range of from 3 to 8 by the slow addition of NaOH.

Formulation Example F

Hard gelatin capsules for oral administration are prepared as follows:

Ingredients Amount Compound of the invention 250 mg Lactose (spray-dried) 200 mg Magnesium stearate  10 mg

-   -   Representative Procedure: The ingredients are thoroughly blended         and then loaded into a hard gelatin capsule (460 mg of         composition per capsule).

Formulation Example G

A suspension for oral administration is prepared as follows:

Ingredients Amount Compound of the invention 1.0 g Fumaric acid 0.5 g Sodium chloride 2.0 g Methyl paraben 0.15 g Propyl paraben 0.05 g Granulated sugar 25.5 g Sorbitol (70% solution) 12.85 g Veegum k (Vanderbilt Co.) 1.0 g Flavoring 0.035 mL Colorings 0.5 mg Distilled water q.s. to 100 mL

-   -   Representative Procedure: The ingredients are mixed to form a         suspension containing 100 mg of active ingredient per 10 mL of         suspension.

Formulation Example H

An injectable formulation is prepared as follows:

Ingredients Amount Compound of the invention 0.2 g Sodium acetate buffer solution (0.4 M) 2.0 mL HCl (0.5 N) or NaOH (0.5 N) q.s. to pH 4 Water (distilled, sterile) q.s. to 20 mL

-   -   Representative Procedure: The above ingredients are blended and         the pH is adjusted to 4±0.5 using 0.5 N HCl or 0.5 N NaOH.

Utility

The compounds of this invention possess both β₂ adrenergic receptor agonist and muscarinic receptor antagonist activity and therefore, such compounds are expected to be useful as therapeutic agents for treating medical conditions mediated by β₂ adrenergic receptors or muscarinic receptors, i.e., medical conditions that are ameliorated by treatment with a β₂ adrenergic receptor agonist or a muscarinic receptor antagonist. See, for example, Eglen et al., Muscarinic Receptor Subtypes: Pharmacology and Therapuetic Potential, DN&P 10(8), 462-469 (1997); Emilien et al., Current Therapeutic Uses and Potential of beta-Adrenoceptor Agonists and Antagonists, European J. Clinical Pharm., 53(6), 389-404 (1998); and references cited therein. Such medical conditions include, by way of example, pulmonary disorders or diseases associated with reversible airway obstruction, such as chronic obstructive pulmonary disease (e.g., chronic and wheezy bronchitis and emphysema), asthma, pulmonary fibrosis and the like. Other conditions include premature labor, depression, congestive heart failure, skin diseases (e.g., inflammatory, allergic, psoriatic and proliferative skin diseases), conditions where lowering peptic acidity is desirable (e.g., peptic and gastric ulceration) and muscle wasting disease.

Accordingly, in one embodiment, this invention is directed to a method for treating a pulmonary disorder, the method comprising administering to a patient in need of treatment a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of formula I or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate or stereoisomer thereof. When used to treat a pulmonary disorder, the compounds of this invention will typically be administered by inhalation in multiple doses per day, in a single daily dose or a single weekly dose. Generally, the dose for treating a pulmonary disorder will range from about 10 μg/day to about 200 μg/day.

When administered by inhalation, the compounds of this invention typically have the effect of producing bronchodilation. Accordingly, in another of its method aspects, this invention is directed to a method of producing bronchodilation in a patient, the method comprising administering to a patient requiring bronchodilation a bronchodilation-producing amount of a compound of formula I or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate or stereoisomer thereof. Generally, the dose for producing bronchodilation will range from about 10 μg/day to about 200 μg/day.

In one embodiment, this invention is directed to a method of treating chronic obstructive pulmonary disease or asthma, the method comprising administering to a patient in need of treatment a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of formula I or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate or stereoisomer thereof. When used to treat a COPD or asthma, the compounds of this invention will typically be administered by inhalation in multiple doses per day or in a single daily dose. Generally, the dose for treating COPD or asthma will range from about 10 μg/day to about 200 μg/day.

As used herein, COPD includes chronic obstructive bronchitis and emphysema (see, for example, Barnes, Chronic Obstructive Pulmonary Disease, N. Engl. J. Med., 2000: 343:269-78).

When used to treat a pulmonary disorder, the compounds of this invention are optionally administered in combination with other therapeutic agents. In particular, by combining the compounds of this invention with a steroidal anti-inflammatory agent (e.g. a corticosteroid), the pharmaceutical compositions of this invention can provide triple therapy, i.e., β₂ adrenergic receptor agonist, muscarinic receptor antagonist and anti-inflammatory activity, using only two active components. Since pharmaceutical compositions containing two active components are typically easier to formulate compared to compositions containing three active components, such two component compositions provide a significant advantage over compositions containing three active components. Accordingly, in a particular embodiment, the pharmaceutical compositions and methods of this invention further comprise a therapeutically effective amount of a steroidal anti-inflammatory agent.

Compounds of this invention exhibit both muscarinic receptor antagonist and β₂ adrenergic receptor agonist activity. Accordingly, among other properties, compounds of particular interest are those that demonstrate an inhibitory constant K_(i) value for binding at the M₃ muscarinic receptor and an EC₅₀ value for β₂ adrenergic receptor agonist activity of less than about 100 nM; particularly less than 10 nM. Among these compounds, compounds of special interest include those having muscarinic activity, expressed in terms of the inhibitory constant K_(i) for binding at the M₃ muscarinic receptor, that is about equal to the compound's β₂ adrenergic agonist activity, expressed in terms of the half maximal effective concentration EC₅₀, as determined in the in vitro assays described herein, or in similar assays. For example, compounds of particular interest are those having a ratio of the inhibitory constant K_(i) for the M₃ muscarinic receptor to the EC₅₀ for the β₂ adrenergic receptor ranging from about 30:1 to about 1:30; including about 20:1 to about 1:20; such as about 10:1 to about 1:10.

Since compounds of this invention possess both β₂ adrenergic agonist activity and muscarinic receptor antagonist activity, such compounds are also useful as research tools for investigating or studying biological systems or samples having β₂ adrenergic receptors or muscarinic receptors, or for discovering new compounds having both β₂ adrenergic agonist activity and muscarinic receptor antagonist activity. Such biological systems or samples may comprise β₂ adrenergic receptors and/or muscarinic receptors. Any suitable biological system or sample having β₂ adrenergic and/or muscarinic receptors may be employed in such studies which may be conducted either in vitro or in vivo. Representative biological systems or samples suitable for such studies include, but are not limited to, cells, cellular extracts, plasma membranes, tissue samples, mammals (such as mice, rats, guinea pigs, rabbits, dogs, pigs, etc.), and the like.

In this embodiment, a biological system or sample comprising a β₂ adrenergic receptor or a muscarinic receptor is contacted with β₂ adrenergic receptor-agonizing or muscarinic receptor-antagonizing amount of a compound of this invention. The effects caused by the compound are then determined or measured using conventional procedures and equipment, such as radioligand binding assays and functional assays. Such functional assays include ligand-mediated changes in intracellular cyclic adenosine monophosphate (cAMP), ligand-mediated changes in activity of the enzyme adenylyl cyclase (which synthesizes cAMP), ligand-mediated changes in incorporation of guanosine 5′-O-(thio)triphosphate ([³⁵S]GTP S) into isolated membranes via receptor catalyzed exchange of [³⁵S]GTP S for GDP, ligand-mediated changes in free intracellular calcium ions (measured, for example, with a fluorescence-linked imaging plate reader or FLIPR® from Molecular Devices, Inc.). A compound of this invention will agonize or cause activation of a β₂ adrenergic receptor and antagonize or decrease the activation of muscarinic receptors in any of the functional assays listed above, or assays of a similar nature. The amount of compound used in these studies will typically range from about 0.1 nanomolar to about 100 nanomolar.

Additionally, the compounds of this invention can be used as research tools for discovering new compounds that have both a β₂ adrenergic receptor agonist and muscarinic receptor antagonist activity. In this embodiment,

β₂ adrenergic receptor and muscarinic receptor binding data (for example, as determined by in vitro radioligand displacement assays) for a test compound or a group of test compounds is compared to the β₂ adrenergic receptor and muscarinic receptor binding data for a compound of this invention to identify those test compounds that have about equal or superior β₂ adrenergic receptor and/or muscarinic receptor binding, if any. This aspect of the invention includes, as separate embodiments, both the generation of comparison data (using the appropriate assays) and the analysis of the test data to identify test compounds of interest.

In some cases, compounds of this invention may possess either weak muscarinic receptor antagonist activity or weak β₂ adrenergic receptor agonist activity. In these cases, those of ordinary skill in the art will recognize that such compounds still have utility as primarily either a β₂ adrenergic receptor agonist or a muscarinic receptor antagonist, respectively.

The properties and utility of the compounds of this invention can be demonstrated using various in vitro and in vivo assays well-known to those skilled in the art. For example, representative assays are described in further detail in the following Examples.

EXAMPLES

The following Preparations and Examples are provided to illustrate specific embodiments of this invention. These specific embodiments, however, are not intended to limit the scope of this invention in any way unless specifically indicated.

The following abbreviations have the following meanings unless otherwise indicated and any other abbreviations used herein and not defined have their standard meaning:

-   -   AC adenylyl cyclase     -   Ach acetylcholine     -   ATCC American Type Culture Collection     -   BSA bovine serum albumin     -   cAMP 3′-5′ cyclic adenosine monophosphate     -   CHO Chinese hamster ovary     -   cM₅ cloned chimpanzee M₅ receptor     -   DCM dichloromethane (i.e., methylene chloride)     -   DIPEA N,N-diisopropylethylamine     -   dPBS Dulbecco's phosphate buffered saline     -   DMEM Dulbecco's Modified Eagle's Medium     -   DMSO dimethyl sulfoxide     -   EDTA ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid     -   Emax maximal efficacy     -   EtOAc ethyl acetate     -   EtOH ethanol     -   FBS fetal bovine serum     -   FLIPR fluorometric imaging plate reader     -   Gly glycine     -   HATU O-(7-azabenzotriazol-1-yl-N,N,N′,N′-tetramethyluronium         hexafluorophosphate     -   HBSS Hank's buffered salt solution     -   HEK human embryonic kidney cells     -   HEPES 4-(2-hydroxyethyl)-1-piperazineethanesulfonic acid     -   hM₁ cloned human Ml receptor     -   hM₂ cloned human M₂ receptor     -   hM₃ cloned human M₃ receptor     -   hM₄ cloned human M₄ receptor     -   hM₅ cloned human M₅ receptor     -   HPLC high-performance liquid chromatography     -   IBMX 3-isobutyl-1-methylxanthine     -   % Eff % efficacy     -   PBS phosphate buffered saline     -   PyBOP benzotriazol-1-yloxytripyrrolidinophosphonium         hexafluorophosphate     -   rpm rotations per minute     -   TFA trifluoroacetic acid     -   THF tetrahydrofuran     -   Tris tris(hydroxymethyl)aminomethane

Unless noted otherwise, reagents, starting materials and solvents were purchased from commercial suppliers (such as Aldrich, Fluka, Sigma and the like) and were used without further purification.

In the examples described below, HPLC analysis was conducted using an Agilent (Palo Alto, Calif.) Series 1100 instrument with Zorbax Bonus RP 2.1×50 mm columns, supplied by Agilent, (a C14 column), having a 3.5 micron particle size. Detection was by UV absorbance at 214 nm. HPLC 10-70 data was obtained with a flow rate of 0.5 mL/minute of 10%-70% B over 6 minutes. Mobile phase A was 2%-98%-0.1% ACN—H₂O-TFA; and mobile phase B was 90%-10%-0.1% ACN—H₂O-TFA. Using the mobile phases A and B described above, HPLC 5-35 data and HPLC 10-90 data were obtained with a 5 minute gradient.

Liquid chromatography mass spectrometry (LCMS) data were obtained with an Applied Biosystems (Foster City, Calif.) model API-150EX instrument. LCMS10-90 data was obtained with a 10%-90% mobile phase B over a 5 minute gradient.

Small scale purification was conducted using an API 150EX Prep Workstation system from Applied Biosystems. The mobile phase was A: water+0.05% v/v TFA; and B: acetonitrile+0.05% v/v TFA. For arrays (typically about 3 to 50 mg recovered sample size) the following conditions were used: 20 mL/min flow rate; 15 min gradients and a 20 mm×50 mm Prism RP column with 5 micron particles (Thermo Hypersil-Keystone, Bellefonte, Pa.). For larger scale purifications (typically greater than 100 mg crude sample), the following conditions were used: 60 mL/min flow rate; 30 min gradients and a 41.4 mm×250 mm Microsorb BDS column with 10 micron particles (Varian, Palo Alto, Calif.).

The specific rotation for chiral compounds (indicated as [α]²⁰D) was measured using a Jasco Polarimeter (Model P-1010) with a tungsten halogen light source and a 589 nm filter at 20° C. Samples of test compounds were typically measured at 1 mg/mL water.

Preparation 1 8-Benzyloxy-5-(2-bromoacetyl)-1H-quinolin-2-one (a) 8-Acetoxy-1H-quinolin-2-one

8-Hydroxyquinoline-N-oxide (160.0 g, 1.0 mol), commercially-available from Aldrich, Milwaukee, Wis., and acetic anhydride (800 mL, 8.4 mol) were heated at 100° C. for 3 h and then cooled in ice. The product was collected on a Buchner funnel, washed with acetic anhydride (2×100 mL) and dried under reduced pressure to give 8-acetoxy-1H-quinolin-2-one (144 g) as a solid.

(b) 5-Acetyl-8-hydroxy-1H-quinolin-2-one

A slurry of aluminum chloride (85.7 g, 640 mmol) in 1,2-dichloroethane (280 mL) was cooled in ice, and the product from step (a) (56.8 g, 280 mmol) was added. The mixture was warmed to room temperature and then heated at 85° C. After 30 min, acetyl chloride (1.5 mL, 21 mmol) was added and the mixture was heated an additional 60 min. The reaction mixture was then cooled and added to 1N hydrochloric acid (3 L) at 0° C. with good stirring. After stirring for 2 h, the solids were collected on a Buchner funnel, washed with water (3×250 mL) and dried under reduced pressure. The crude product isolated from several batches (135 g) was combined and triturated with dichloromethane (4 L) for 6 h. The resulting solid was collected on a Buchner funnel and dried under reduced pressure to give the title compound (121 g).

(c) 5-Acetyl-8-benzyloxy-1H-quinolin-2-one

To the product from step (b) (37.7 g, 186 mmol) was added N,N-dimethylformamide (200 mL) and potassium carbonate (34.5 g, 250 mmol) followed by benzyl bromide (31.8 g, 186 mmol). The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 2.25 hour and then poured into saturated sodium chloride (3.5 L) at 0° C. and stirred for 1 hour. The product was collected and dried on a Buchner funnel for 1 hour, and the resulting solids were dissolved in dichloromethane (2 L) and this mixture was dried over sodium sulfate. The solution was filtered through a pad of Celite which was then washed with dichloromethane (5×200 mL). The combined filtrate was then concentrated to dryness and the resulting solids were triturated with ether (500 mL) for 2 h. The product was collected on a Buchner funnel, washed with ether (2×250 mL) and dried under reduced pressure to give the title compound (44 g) as a powder.

(d) 8-Benzyloxy-5-(2-bromoacetyl)-1H-quinolin-2-one

The product from step (c) (20.0 g, 68.2 mmol) was dissolved in dichloromethane (200 mL) and cooled to 0° C. Boron trifluoride diethyl etherate (10.4 mL, 82.0 mmol) was added via syringe and the mixture was warmed to room temperature to give a thick suspension. The suspension was heated at 45° C. (oil bath) and a solution of bromine (11.5 g, 72.0 mmol) in dichloromethane (100 mL) was added over 40 min. The mixture was kept at 45° C. for an additional 15 min and then cooled to room temperature. The mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure and then triturated with 10% aqueous sodium carbonate (200 mL) for 1 hour. The solids were collected on a Buchner funnel, washed with water (4×100 mL) and dried under reduced pressure. The product of two runs was combined for purification. The crude product (52 g) was triturated with 50% methanol in chloroform (500 mL) for 1 hour. The product was collected on a Buchner funnel and washed with 50% methanol in chloroform (2×50 mL) and methanol (2×50 mL). The solid was dried under reduced pressure to give the title compound (34.1 g) as a powder.

Preparation 2 8-Benzyloxy-5-[(R)-2-bromo-1-(tert-butyldimethylsilanyloxy)ethyl]-1H-quinolin-2-one (a) 8-Benzyloxy-5-((R)-2-bromo-1-hydroxyethyl)-1H-quinolin-2-one

(R)-(+)-α,α-Diphenylprolinol (30.0 g, 117 mmol) and trimethylboroxine (11.1 mL, 78 mmol) were combined in toluene (300 mL) and stirred at room temperature for 30 min. The mixture was placed in a 150° C. oil bath and liquid was distilled off. Toluene was added in 20 mL aliquots and distillation was continued for 4 h. A total of 300 mL toluene was added. The mixture was then cooled to room temperature. A 500 μL aliquot was evaporated to dryness and weighed (246 mg) to determine that the concentration of catalyst was 1.8 M.

8-Benzyloxy 5-(2-bromoacetyl)-1H-quinolin-2-one (90.0 g, 243 mmol) was placed under nitrogen and tetrahydrofuran (900 mL) was added followed by the catalyst described above (1.8 M in toluene, 15 mL, 27 mmol). The suspension was cooled to −10±5° C. in an ice/isopropanol bath. Borane (1.0 M in THF, 294 mL, 294 mmol) was added over 4 h. The reaction was then stirred an additional 45 min at −10° C. and then methanol (250 mL) was added slowly. The mixture was concentrated under vacuum and the residue was dissolved in boiling acetonitrile (1.3 L), filtered while hot and then cooled to room temperature. The crystals were filtered, washed with acetonitrile and dried under vacuum to give the title compound (72.5 g, 196 mmol, 81% yield, 95% ee, 95% pure by HPLC).

(b) 8-Benzyloxy-5-[(R)-2-bromo-1-(tert-butyldimethylsilanyloxy)ethyl]-1H-quinolin-2-one

To the product of step (b) (70.2 g, 189 mmol) was added N,N-dimethylformamide (260 mL) and this mixture was cooled in an ice bath under nitrogen. 2,6-Lutidine (40.3 g, 376 mmol) was added over 5 min and then tert-butyldimethylsilyl trifluoromethanesulfonate (99.8 g, 378 mmol) was added slowly while maintaining the temperature below 20° C. The mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature for 45 min. Methanol (45 mL) was added to the mixture dropwise over 10 min and the mixture was partitioned between ethyl acetate/cyclohexane (1:1, 500 mL) and water/brine (1:1, 500 mL). The organics were washed twice more with water/brine (1:1, 500 mL each). The combined organics were evaporated under reduced pressure to give a light yellow oil. Two separate portions of cyclohexane (400 mL) were added to the oil and distillation continued until a thick white slurry was formed. Cyclohexane (300 mL) was added to the slurry and the resulting white crystals were filtered, washed with cyclohexane (300 mL) and dried under reduced pressure to give the title compound (75.4 g, 151 mmol, 80% yield, 98.6% ee).

Preparation 3A 8-Benzyloxy-5-[(R)-2-(N-benzylamino)-1-(tert-butyldimethylsilanyloxy)ethyl]-1H-quinolin-2-one

A stirred solution of the product of Preparation 2 (1.00 g, 2.05 mmol) and benzylamine (493 μL, 4.51 mmol) in DMSO (1.7 mL) was heated at 105° C. for 4 h. The reaction mixture was allowed to cool and was then diluted with EtOAc (10 mL) and the organic layer was washed with saturated aqueous ammonium chloride solution (5 mL) and 1N sodium hydroxide (5 mL), dried (MgSO₄) and solvent removed under reduced pressure. The crude residue was purified by column chromatography (50% EtOAc/hexanes) to give the title compound (700 mg, 67%). MS m/z: [M+H⁺] calcd for C₃₁H₃₈N₂O₃Si 515.27; found 515.5.

Preparation 3B 8-Benzyloxy-5-[(R)-2-(N-benzylamino)-1-(tert-butyldimethylsilanyloxy)ethyl]-1H-quinolin-2-one

To a 500 mL three-necked round-bottom flask was added 8-benzyloxy-5-[(R)-2-bromo-1-(tert-butyldimethylsilanyloxy)ethyl]-1H-quinolin-2-one (43 g, 0.124 mol, about 95% chiral purity), 1-methyl-2-pyrrolidinone (210 mL) and benzylamine (28.3 g, 0.37 mol). The resulting mixture was flushed with nitrogen and then stirred at 90° C. for 6 hours. The mixture was then cooled to room temperature and water (300 mL) and ethyl acetate (300 mL) were added. The layers were separated and the organic layer was washed with water (200 mL), a 1:1 mixture of water and aqueous saturated sodium chloride solution (200 mL), and water (200 mL). The organic layer was then dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure to provide the title compound as an orange oil.

To the orange oil was added heptane (200 mL) and ethyl acetate (200 mL) and the resulting mixture was heated to 65° C. to produce a clear solution. This solution was cooled to room temperature and allowed to stand overnight (about 16 hours) at which time a precipitate had formed. The precipitate was collected by filtration to give stereochemically-impure title compound (8.85 g, 79.6% ee). The filtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure to give the title compound (38.6 g, 99.4% ee). This material was combined with a previous batch of material (19.2 g, 99.5% ee) and heptane (250 mL) and ethyl acetate (100 mL) were added. This mixture was heated to 80° C. (hazy to clear solution) and then cooled to room temperature and allowed to stand overnight. The resulting precipitate was collected by filtration to afford the title compound as a white solid (36.8 g. 98.4% ee, 99.9% chemical purity). The filtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure and the residue was dissolved in heptane (100 mL). The resulting solids were collected to give the title compound as a tan solid (24 g, 100% chiral purity, 95% ee).

Preparation 4 5-[(R)-2-Amino-1-(tert-butyldimethylsilanyloxy)ethyl]-8-hydroxy-1H-quinolin-2-one Acetic Acid Salt

8-Benzyloxy-5-[(R)-2-(N-benzylamino)-1-(tert-butyldimethylsilanyloxy)ethyl]-1H-quinolin-2-one (100 g, 194 mmol) and acetic acid (17.5 mL, 291 mmol) were dissolved in methanol (1 L). The clear solution was purged with nitrogen and then palladium hydroxide on carbon (20 g, 20 wt. % Pd (dry basis), wet (about 50% water)) was added. Hydrogen gas was bubbled through the stirred solution at room temperature for 6 hours during which time a thick slurry developed. The reaction mixture was then purged with nitrogen and methanol (1 L) was added. The resulting mixture was stirred for about 30 minutes (to dissolve the product) and then the mixture was filtered through a pad of Celite. The filterate was concentrated under reduced pressure to a volume of about 500 mL and, to the resulting slurry, was added ethanol (500 mL). The resulting mixture was again concentrated under reduced pressure to a volume of about 500 mL and the resulting precipitate was collected by filtration and dried to provide the title compound as a yellow-white solid (65 g, 85% yield, >98% purity).

Preparation 5 2-(8-Bromooctyl)-[1,3]dioxolane

9-Bromo-1-nonanol (10 g, 45 mmol) was dissolved in dichloromethane (230 mL) and to this solution was added diisopropylethylamine (23.5 mL, 134 mmol) and dimethyl sulfoxide (9.66 mL, 134 mmol). The flask was sealed under a nitrogen atmosphere and cooled to −15° C. Pyridine sulfur trioxide complex (21.4 g, 134 mmol) was added in about four equal portions at about 5 minute intervals. The reaction was then quenched by adding water and the layers were separated. The organic layer was washed with aqueous sodium bisulfate (1M×4), aqueous saturated sodium carbonate (×1), brine (×1) and then dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure.

The resulting oil was dissolved in toluene (4 mL) and ethylene glycol (7.5 mL, 134 mmol) and 4 drops of 4.0M hydrogen chloride solution in 1,4-dioxane were added. The reaction mixture was heated at reflux over night. The reaction mixture was then cooled to room temperature and transferred to a separatory funnel. The mixture was then washed with water (×3), brine (×1) and the organic layer was dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was chromatographed over silica gel eluting with 5% ethyl acetate:hexane to give the title compound as a clear oil. ¹H NMR (CDCl₃, δ): 4.8 (t, 1H), 3.9 (m, 2H), 3.8 (m, 2H), 3.45 (t, 2H), 1.85 (m, 2H), 1.6 (m, 2H), 1.5-1.25 (m, 10H).

Preparation 6 (2-Bromophenyl)carbamic Acid Piperidin-4-yl Ester Hydrochloride Salt

1-tert-Butoxycarbonyl-4-hydroxypiperidine (8.98 g, 44.6 mmol) was dissolved in N,N-dimethylformamide (40 mL) and to this solution was added 2-bromophenylisocyanate (5 mL, 40.6 mmol). The reaction mixture was sealed under nitrogen and heated at 60° C. overnight. The solvent was then removed under reduced pressure and the resulting oil was dissolved in ethyl acetate. The organic layer was washed with aqueous sodium bisulfate (1M×2), 20% aqueous potassium carbonate solution (×1), brine (×1) and then the organic layer was then dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure to afford a white solid.

The solid was dissolved in 4M hydrogen chloride solution in 1,4-dioxane and stirred at room temperature for 3 hours. The solvent was evaporated under reduced pressure and the resulting residue was triturated with diethyl ether to afford the title compound as a white solid. ¹H NMR (CD₃OD, δ): 7.75 (br d, 1H), 7.65 (d of m, 1H), 7.35 (t of m, 1H), 7.05 (t of m, 1H), 5.05 (m, 1H), 3.35 (m, 2H), 3.25 (m, 2H), 2.2 (m, 2H), 2.0 (m, 2H).

Preparation 7 (2-Bromophenyl)carbamic Acid 1-(8-[1,3]Dioxolan-2-yloctyl)piperidin-4-yl Ester

The product of Preparation 5 (950 mg, 3.58 mmol) was dissolved in acetonitrile (10 mL) and to this solution was added the product of Preparation 6 (1 g, 2.98 mmol) and diisopropylethylamine (1.2 mL, 6.9 mmol). The resulting mixture was then heated at 55° C. overnight. The reaction mixture was then cooled to room temperature and the solvent was evaporated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified on silica gel eluting with 1.5% methanol:chloroform to give the title compound as a semi-solid (1.4 g, 97% yield). ¹H NMR (CD₃OD, δ): 7.7 (br d, 1H), 7.6 (d of m, 1H), 7.35 (t of m, 1H), 7.05 (t of m, 1H), 4.8 (m, 2H), 3.9 (m, 2H), 3.8 (m, 2H), 3.0 (m, 2H), 2.6 (m, 4H), 2.1 (m, 2H), 1.9 (m, 2H), 1.6 (m, 4H), 1.5-1.3 (m, 10H).

Preparation 8 (2-Thien-2-ylphenyl)carbamic Acid 1-(8-[1,3]-Dioxolan-2-yloctyl)piperidin-4-yl Ester

The product of Preparation 7 (200 mg, 0.41 mmol) was dissolved in a 1:1 mixture of ethylene glycol dimethyl ether and N,N-dimethylformamide (2 mL total) and to this solution was added 2-thiopheneboronic acid (80 mg, 0.62 mmol) and aqueous potassium carbonate solution (4M, 205 μL, 0.82 mmol). The vial was flushed with nitrogen and then [1,1′-bis(diphenylphosphino)ferrocene]dichloropalladium(II) (catalytic amount) was added and the vial was sealed and heated on a shaker block at 86° C. overnight. The reaction was not complete so an additional amount of 2-thiophene boronic acid (80 mg, 0.62 mmol), aqueous potassium carbonate (4M, 205 μL, 0.82 mmol) and [1,1′-bis(diphenylphosphino)ferrocene]dichloropalladium(II) (catalytic amount) were added. The reaction mixture was heated at 86° C. for an additional 2 hours and then the solvent was removed under reduced pressure. The residue was dissolved in dichloromethane and washed with aqueous sodium bisulfate (1M×2), aqueous sodium hydroxide (1N×2), brine (×1) and the organic layer was dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified over silica gel eluting with 2.5% methanol:chloroform to the title compound (90 mg). LCMS m/z: 487.3 (MH⁺).

Example 1 (2-Thien-2-ylphenyl)carbamic Acid 1-{9-[(R)-2-Hydroxy-2-(8-hydroxy-2-oxo-1,2-dihydroquinolin-5-yl)ethylamino]nonyl}piperidin-4-yl Ester

The product of Preparation 8 (90 mg, 0.18 mmol) was dissolved in a 1:1 mixture of acetonitrile (1.5 mL) and aqueous hydrochloric acid (6N, 1.5 mL) and the resulting mixture was heated at 50° C. for 1 hour. The mixture was then concentrated under reduced pressure to remove the acetonitrile and the remaining aqueous mixture was diluted with brine and this mixture was extracted with dichloromethane. The organic layer was then dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure to give crude (2-thien-2-ylphenyl)carbamic acid 1-(9-oxononyl)piperidin-4-yl ester.

This residue was dissolved in a 1:1 mixture of dichloromethane (1 mL) and methanol (1 mL) and to this solution was added the product of Preparation 4 (88 mg, 0.22 mmol) and sodium triacetoxyborohydride (114 mg, 0.54 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight and then concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was dissolved in a 1:1 mixture of acetonitrile (2.5 mL) and aqueous hydrochloric acid (6N, 2.5 mL) and this mixture was heated at 50° C. for 2.5 hours. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure and the resulting foam was dissolved in a 1:1 mixture of acetic acid (3 mL) and water (3 mL), and then purified by reverse phase preparative HPLC to afford to the title compound as a white lyophilized solid (15.1 mg). LCMS m/z: 647.5 (MH⁺).

Preparation 9 (2-Thien-3-ylphenyl)carbamic Acid 1-(8-[1,3]Dioxolan-2-yloctyl)piperidin-4-yl Ester

The product of Preparation 7 (200 mg, 0.41 mmol) was dissolved in a 1:1 mixture of ethylene glycol dimethyl ether and N,N-dimethylformamide (2 mL total) and to this solution was added 3-thiopheneboronic acid (80 mg, 0.62 mmol) and aqueous potassium carbonate solution (4M, 205 μL, 0.82 mmol). The vial was flushed with nitrogen and then [1,1′-bis(diphenylphosphino)ferrocene]dichloropalladium(II) (catalytic amount) was added and the vial was sealed and heated on a shaker block at 86° C. overnight. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure and the residue was dissolved in dichloromethane and washed with aqueous sodium bisulfate (1M×2), aqueous sodium hydroxide (1N×2), brine (×1) and the organic layer was dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified over silica gel eluting with 2.5% methanol:chloroform to the title compound (149 mg).

Example 2 (2-Thien-3-ylphenyl)carbamic Acid 1-{9-[(R)-2-Hydroxy-2-(8-hydroxy-2-oxo-1,2-dihydroquinolin-5-yl)ethylamino]nonyl}piperidin-4-yl Ester

The product of Preparation 9 (149 mg, 0.31 mmol) was dissolved in a 1:1 mixture of acetonitrile (1.5 mL) and aqueous hydrochloric acid (6N, 1.5 mL) and the resulting mixture was heated at 50° C. for 2 hour. The mixture was then concentrated under reduced pressure to remove the acetonitrile and the remaining aqueous mixture was diluted with brine and this mixture was extracted with dichloromethane. The organic layer was then dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure to give crude (2-thien-3-ylphenyl)carbamic acid 1-(9-oxononyl)piperidin-4-yl ester.

This residue was dissolved in a 1:1 mixture of dichloromethane (1 mL) and methanol (1 mL) and to this solution was added the product of Preparation 4 (146 mg, 0.37 mmol) and sodium triacetoxyborohydride (200 mg, 0.93 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight and then concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was dissolved in a 1:1 mixture of acetonitrile (2.5 mL) and aqueous hydrochloric acid (6N, 2.5 mL) and this mixture was heated at 50° C. for 2.5 hours. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure and the resulting foam was dissolved in a 1:1 mixture of acetic acid (3 mL) and water (3 mL), and then purified by reverse phase preparative HPLC to afford to the title compound as a white lyophilized solid (37.0 mg). LCMS m/z: 647.5 (MH⁺).

Preparation 10 (2-Bromo-4,6-difluoro-phenyl)carbamic Acid Piperidin-4-yl Ester

1-tert-Butoxycarbonyl-4-hydroxypiperidine (4 g, 19.8 mmol) was dissolved in N,N-dimethylformamide (18 mL) and to this solution was added 2-bromo-4,6-difluorophenlisocyanate (4.22 g, 18 mmol). The reaction mixture was heated at 60° C. overnight and then the solvent was removed under reduced pressure. The resulting oil was dissolved in 4M hydrogen chloride solution in 1,4-dioxane (25 mL) and heated at 50° C. for 2 hours. The reaction mixture was then concentrated under reduced pressure to afford a pale solid which was dissolved in dichloromethane and this solution was washed with aqueous sodium hydroxide (1N, ×3), dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered and concentrated to provide the title compound as an off white solid. ¹H NMR (CDCl₃, δ): 7.35 (m, 1H), 7.1 (m, 1H), 4.8 (m, 1H), 3.0 (br m, 2H), 2.7 (br m, 2H), 1.95 (br m, 2H), 1.6 (br m, 2H).

Preparation 11 9-Bromononanal

9-Bromononan-1-ol (3 g. 13.4 mmol) was dissolved in dichloromethane (70 mL, 0.2M) and to this solution were added dimethyl sulfoxide (2.9 mL, 40.3 mmol) and diisopropylethylamine (7.0 mL, 40.3 mmol). The flask was then sealed under nitrogen and cooled to −15° C. Pyridine sulfur trioxide complex (6.4 g, 40.3 mmol) was added in two equal portions over 2 minutes and the resulting mixture was stirred at temperature between −10° C. and −20° C. for 30 minutes. The reaction was then quenched by adding water and the layers were separated. The organic layer was washed with aqueous sodium bisulfate (1M×3) and brine (×1), and then dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure to give the title compound as an amber oil (2.4 g 81% yield). ¹H NMR (CDCl₃, δ): 9.78 (s, 1H), 3.40 (t, 2H), 2.43 (t, 2H), 1.85 (m, 2H), 1.63 (m, 2H), 1.5-1.25 (m, 8H).

Preparation 12 5-[(R)-2-[Benzyl-(9-bromononyl)amino]-1-(tert-butyldimethylsilanyloxy)ethyl]-8-benzyloxy-1H-quinolin-2-one

The product of Preparation 3B (1.74 g, 3.38 mmol) was dissolved in a 1:1 mixture of methanol (5 mL) and dichloromethane (5 mL) and to this solution was added the product of Preparation II (972 mg, 4.4 mmol) and sodium triacetoxyborohydride (2.14 g, 10.1 mmol). The resulting mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight and then concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was dissolved in ethyl acetate and this solution was washed with aqueous sodium bisulfate (1M, ×2), aqueous sodium hydroxide (1M, ×1), and brine (×1), and then dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was then flash chromatographed to afford the title compound (2.1 g, 87% yield). LCMS m/z: 721.5 (MH⁺).

Preparation 13 (2-Bromo-4,6-difluorophenyl)carbamic Acid 1-(9-{Benzyl-[(R)-2-(8-benzyloxy-2-oxo-1,2-dihydroquinolin-5-yl)-2-(tert-butyldimethylsilanyloxy)ethyl]amino}-nonyl)piperidin-4-yl Ester

The product of Preparation 10 (200 mg, 0.6 mmol) and the product of Preparation 12 (430 mg, 0.6 mmol) were suspended in acetonitrile (2 mL) and diisopropylethylamine (210 μL) was added. The resulting mixture was heated to 60° C. overnight. The solvent was then removed under reduced pressure to give an orange foam which was chromatographed over silica gel eluting with 5% methanol:chloroform to afford the title compound as a pale foam (475 mg, 82% yield).

Preparation 14 (2,4-Difluoro-6-pyridin-3-ylphenyl)carbamic Acid 1-(9-{Benzyl-[(R)-2-(8-benzyloxy-2-oxo-1,2-dihydroquinolin-5-yl)-2-(tert-butyldimethylsilanyloxy)ethyl]amino}-nonyl)-piperidin-4-yl Ester

The product of Preparation 13 (125 mg, 0.13 mmol) was dissolved in N,N-dimethylformamide (0.5 mL) in a 4 mL glass vial. To this solution was added 3-pyridine boronic acid (18 mg, 0.15 mmol) and 2M aqueous potassium carbonate (98 μL, 0.2 mmol). The vial was then flushed with nitrogen and [1,1′-bis(diphenylphosphino)ferrocene]-dichloropalladium(II) (catalytic amount) was added and then the vial was sealed and heated at 90° C. overnight. The reaction mixture was then concentrated under reduced pressure and the residue was dissolved in dichloromethane. This mixture was washed with water (×2) and brine (×1), and then dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was chromatographed over silica gel eluting with 1.5% methanol:chloroform to afford the title compound as a foam (18 mg).

Example 3 (2,4-Difluoro-6-pyridin-3-ylphenyl)carbamic Acid 1-{9-[(R)-2-Hydroxy-2-(8-hydroxy-2-oxo-1,2-dihydroquinolin-5-yl)ethylamino]nonyl}piperidin-4-yl Ester

The product of Preparation 14 (18 mg, 0.02 mmol) was dissolved in ethanol (3 mL) and nitrogen gas was bubbled through the solution. Palladium on activated carbon (50 mg, 10%, degussa type) was added and the reaction mixture was stirred under a hydrogen-filled ballon. After 2 hours, the balloon was removed and nitrogen gas was bubbled through the reaction mixture. The mixture was then filtered through Celite and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was dissolved in a 1:1 mixture of acetonitrile (2 mL) and aqueous hydrochloric acid (6N, 2 mL) and heated at 60° C. for 2 hours. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure and the residue was dissolved in a solution of acetonitrile:water:trifluoro acetic acid (1:1:0.05, 5 mL) and purified by preparative reverse phase chromatography to afford the title compound (3.8 mg). LCMS m/z: 678.5 (MH⁺).

Preparation 15 (2-Bromophenyl)carbamic Acid 1-(2-tert-Butoxycarbonylaminoethyl)piperidin-4-yl Ester

To a stirred solution of the product of Preparation 6 (6.76 mmol) and DIPEA (3.54 mL, 20.3 mmol) in acetonitrile (67.6 mL) at 50° C. is added 2-tert-butoxycarbonylaminoethyl bromide (1.82 g, 8.11 mmol) and the reaction mixture is heated at 50° C. overnight. The solvent is then removed under reduced pressure and the residue is purified by flash chromatography to yield the title compound.

Preparation 16 (2-Bromophenyl)carbamic Acid 1-(2-Aminoethyl)piperidin-4-yl Ester

The product of Preparation 15 is dissolved in TFA/DCM (25%, 52 mL) and stirred at room temperature for 2 h. The solvent is then removed under reduced pressure and the residue is purified by flash chromatography to yield the title compound.

Preparation 17 (2-Bromophenyl)carbamic Acid 1-[2-(4-Aminomethylbenzoylamino)ethyl]piperidin-4-yl Ester

To a stirred solution of the product of Preparation 16 (1 mmol), 4-(tert-butoxycarbonylaminomethyl)benzoic acid (301 mg, 1.2 mmol) and HATU (456 mg, 1.2 mmol) in DMF (2 mL) is added DIPEA (226 μL, 1.3 mmol). The reaction mixture is stirred at room temperature overnight and then the solvent is removed under reduced pressure. The resulting residue is dissolved in TFA/DCM (25%, 10 mL) and this mixture is stirred at room temperature for 2 h. The solvent is removed under reduced pressure and the residue is purified by flash chromatography to yield the title compound.

Preparation 18 (2-Bromophenyl)carbamic Acid 1-[2-(4-{[(R)-2-(8-Benzyloxy-2-oxo-1,2-dihydroquinolin-5-yl)-2-(tert-butyldimethylsilanyloxy)ethylamino]methyl}benzoylamino)-ethyl]piperidin-4-yl Ester

A solution of the product of Preparation 17 (1.1 mmol), the product of Preparation 2 (634 mg, 1.3 mmol), sodium bicarbonate (277 mg, 3.3 mmol) and sodium iodide (215 mg, 1.43 mmol) in THF (0.55 mL) is heated at 80° C. for 12 h. The solvent is removed under reduced pressure and the crude residue is purified by flash chromatography to give the title compound.

Example 4 (2-Thien-3-ylphenyl)carbamic Acid 1-[2-(4-{[(R)-2-Hydroxy-2-(8-hydroxy-2-oxo-1,2-dihydroquinolin-5-yl)ethylamino]methyl}benzoylamino)ethyl]piperidin-4-yl Ester

Using the product of Preparation 18 and following the procedures described in Preparation 9 (i.e., Suzuki coupling using 3-thiopheneboronic acid) and Example 3 (i.e., debenzylation and desilylation), the title compound is prepared as the ditrifluoroacetate salt.

Preparation 19 Methyl 4-Iodophenylacetate

To a stirred solution of 4-iodophenylacetic acid (5.0 g, 19.1 mmol) in MeOH (200 mL) was added 4N hydrochloric acid in dioxane (10 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred for 24 h at room temperature and then the solvent was removed under reduced pressure to give the title compound (5.17 g, 98% yield), which was used without further purification.

Preparation 20 Methyl[4-(4-Hydroxybut-1-ynyl)phenyl]acetate

To a stirred solution of the product of Preparation 19 (4.5 g, 16.3 mmol) in diethylamine (100 mL) was added but-3-yn-1-ol (1.9 mL, 32.6 mmol), Pd(PPh₃)₂Cl₂ (500 mg, 1.63 mmol) and CuI (154 mg, 0.815 mmol) and resulting mixture was stirred for 17 h at room temperature. The solvent was then removed under reduced pressure and the residue was dissolved in diethyl ether (200 mL) and this solution was filtered to remove salts. The solvent was then removed under reduced pressure and the crude product was purified by silica gel chromatography (60% EtOAc/Hexane) to afford the title intermediate (3.03 g, 91% yield).

Preparation 21 Methyl[4-(4-Hydroxybutyl)phenyl]acetate

A stirred solution of the product of Preparation 20 (2.8 g, 12.8 mmol) in methanol (50 mL) was flushed with nitrogen and then 10% palladium on carbon (400 mg, 20% wt/wt) was added. The reaction flask was then alternately placed under vacuum and flushed with hydrogen for cycles and then stirred under hydrogen for 14 h. The reaction mixture was flushed with nitrogen and then filtered and the solvent removed under reduced pressure to give the title compound (2.75 g, 97% yield), which was used without further purification.

Preparation 22 Methyl (4-{4-[4-(2-Bromophenylcarbamoyloxy)piperidin-1-yl]butyl}phenyl)acetate (a) Methyl {4-[4-(Toluene-4-sulfonyloxy)butyl]phenyl}acetate

To a stirred solution of the product of Preparation 21 (2.6 g, 12.5 mmol) in THF (100 mL) was added DABCO (2.6 g, 25.0 mmol) and then p-toluenesulfonyl chloride (2.44 g, 13.75 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 23 h and then solvent was removed under reduced pressure and the residue was dissolved in dichloromethane (200 mL). The organic layer was then washed with water (2×100 mL), 1N hydrochloric acid (100 mL), aqueous saturated sodium chloride solution (100 mL), dried (MgSO₄), filtered and the solvent removed under reduced pressure to give the title compound, which was used without further purification.

(b) Methyl (4-{4-[4-(2-Bromophenylcarbamoyloxy)piperidin-1-yl]butyl}phenyl)acetate

To the crude product from step (a) is added DMF (50 mL), diisopropylethylamine (3.0 mL, 17.3 mmol) and the product of Preparation 6 (8.1 mmol). The reaction mixture is stirred at room temperature for 18 h and then the solvent is removed under reduced pressure to give the title compound.

Preparation 23 Methyl (4-{4-[4-(2-Thien-3-ylphenylcarbamoyloxy)piperidin-1-yl]butyl}phenyl)-acetate

Using the product of Preparation 22 and following the procedures described in Preparation 9 (i.e., Suzuki coupling using 3-thiopheneboronic acid), the title compound is prepared.

Preparation 24 (2-Thien-3-ylphenyl)carbamic Acid 1-{4-[4-(2-Hydroxyethyl)phenyl]butyl}piperidin-4-yl Ester

To a stirred solution of the product of Preparation 23 (4.0 mmol) in THF (100 mL) is added dropwise DIBAL-H (24 mL, 24 mmol, 1.0 M in THF). After the addition is complete, the reaction mixture is stirred for 3 h and then quenched by slow addition of methanol (until gas evolution ceased). The mixture is then concentrated to dryness and the residue is purified by flash chromatography to give the title compound.

Preparation 25 (2-Thien-3-ylphenyl)carbamic Acid 1-{4-[4-(2-Oxoethyl)phenyl]butyl}piperidin-4-yl Ester

To a stirred solution of the product of Preparation 24 (1.06 mmol) in dichloromethane (25 mL) is added dimethyl sulfoxide (0.60 mL, 10.6 mmol) and diisopropylethylamine (0.921 mL, 5.3 mmol). The reaction mixture is then cooled to −10° C. and pyridine sulfur trioxide (842 mg, 5.3 mmol) is added. The reaction mixture is stirred for 1 h and then concentrated to dryness and the residue is purified by flash chromatography to give the title compound.

Example 5 (2-Thien-3-ylphenyl)carbamic Acid 1-[4-(4-{2-[(R)-2-Hydroxy-2-(8-hydroxy-2-oxo-1,2-dihydroquinolin-5-yl)ethylamino]ethyl}phenyl)butyl]piperidin-4-yl Ester

The product of Preparation 25 (1.28 mmol) is dissolved in methanol (6.4 mL) and the product of Preparation 4 (605 mg, 1.53 mmol) and diisopropylethylamine (0.27 mL, 1.53 mmol) are added. Sodium triacetoxyborohydride (405 mg, 1.91 mmol) is then added and the reaction mixture is stirred at room temperature for 3 h. The reaction mixture is then concentrated to dryness. To the residue is added dichloromethane (4.5 mL) and triethylamine trihydrofluoride (1.5 mL, 8.87 mmol) and the resulting mixture is stirred at room temperature for 24 h. The mixture is then concentrated under vacuum and purified by HPLC to give the title compound as the ditrifluoroacetate salt.

Preparation 26 (2-Thien-3-ylphenyl)carbamic Acid Piperidin-4-yl Ester (a) 4-(2-Bromophenylcarbamoyloxy)piperidine-1-carboxylic Acid tert-Butyl Ester

2-Bromophenyl isocyanate (10.2 g, 51.5 mmol) was dissolved in N,N-dimethylformamide (40 mL) with 4-hydroxy-piperidine-1-carboxylic acid tert-butyl ester (10.36 g, 51.5 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at 50° C. for 20 hours before being concentrated under reduced pressure. The crude was taken up in dichloromethane (200 mL) and washed with water (2×150 mL) and brine (1×150 mL). The organic phase was dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure to give the title compound as a light yellow oil (21.36 g). MS m/z: [M+H⁺] calcd for C₁₇H₂₃BrN₂O₄ 399-08; found 399.3.

(b) 4-(2-Thiophen-3-ylphenylcarbamoyloxy)piperidine-1-carboxylic Acid tert-Butyl Ester

The product of step (a) (6.5 g, 16.26 mmol), 3-thiophene boronic acid (3.12 g, 24.4 mmol) and potassium carbonate (4.5 g, 32.5 mmol) were dissolved in a 3:1 mixture of ethylene glycol dimethyl ether (60 mL) and N,N-dimethylformamide (20 mL) and then tetrakis(triphenylphosphine) palladium (1.00 g, 0.866 mmol) was added. The reaction mixture was sealed under nitrogen gas and stirred at 90° C. overnight. An additional amount of tetrakis(triphenylphosphine) palladium (200 mg, 0.173 mmol) was added, and the reaction mixture was stirred at ambient temperature for four days. The reaction mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure, taken up in ethyl acetate, and washed with 1M hydrochloric acid, brine and saturated sodium bicarbonate. The organic phase was dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure to give the title compound as a red oil (8.13 g). MS m/z: [M+H⁺] calcd for C₂₁H₂₆N₂O₄S 403.16; found 403.5.

(c) (2-Thiophen-3-ylphenyl)carbamic Acid Piperidin-4-yl Ester

A stirred solution of the product from step (b) (1.1 g, 2.74 mmol) in 4M hydrochloric acid in dioxane (30 mL) was heated at 50° C. for 8 h. After 8 h, the reaction mixture was allowed to cool and the solvent was removed under reduced pressure to give the title compound as a yellow solid which was used without further purification.

Preparation 27 Methyl 4-Amino-5-chloro-2-methoxybenzoate

To a solution of 4-amino-5-chloro-2-methoxybenzoic acid (1.008 g, 5.0 mmol) in a mixture of toluene (9 mL) and methanol (1 mL) at 0° C. was added (trimethylsilyl)diazomethane (2.0 M in hexane, 3.0 mL, 6.0 mmol) dropwise. The reaction mixture was then warmed to room temperature and stirred for 16 h. Excess (trimethylsilyl)diazomethane was quenched by adding acetic acid until the bright yellow color of the reaction mixture disappeared. The mixture was then concentrated in vacuo to give the title compound as an off-white solid, which was used without further purification.

Preparation 28 Methyl 4-Acryloylamino-5-chloro-2-methoxybenzoate

To the crude product of Preparation 27 was added dichloromethane (10 mL, 0.5 M) and triethylamine (2.1 mL, 15 mmol). This mixture was cooled to 0° C. and acryloyl chloride (812 μL, 10 mmol) was added dropwise with stirring. After 2 h, the reaction was quenched by adding methanol (about 2 mL) at 0° C. and the resulting mixture was stirred at room temperature for 15 min and then concentrated in vacuo. Dichloromethane (30 mL) and water (30 mL) were added to the residue and this mixture was mixed thoroughly. The layers were separated and the aqueous layer was extracted with dichloromethane (20 mL). The organic layers were combined, dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and the solvent was removed in vacuo to give the title compound as a brown foamy solid.

Preparation 29 Methyl 5-Chloro-2-methoxy-4-{3-[4-(2-thiophen-3-ylphenylcarbamoyloxy)piperidin-1-yl]propionylamino}benzoate

The crude product from Preparation 28 (150 mg, 0.5 mmol) and the product of Preparation 26 (135 mg, 0.5 mmol) were stirred together in a mixture of dichloromethane and methanol (15 mL, 1/1) at room temperature for 2 h. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure. The residue was chromatographed to give the title compound as a yellow oil (210 mg). MS (m/z): [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₂₈H₃₀ClN₃O₆S, 572.15; found, 572.6.

Preparation 30 (2-Thien-3-ylphenyl)carbamic Acid 1-[2-(2-Chloro-4-hydroxymethyl-5-methoxyphenylcarbamoyl)ethyl]piperidin-4-yl Ester

To a stirred solution of lithium aluminum hydride (0.74 mL of a 1M solution in tetrahydrofuran) in tetrahydrofuran (1.45 mL) under nitrogen at 0° C., was added the product of Preparation 29(210 mg, 0.37 mmol) in tetrahydrofuran (1.0 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at 0° C. for 1 h and lithium aluminum hydride in tetrahydrofuran (0.37 mL, 1M) was added. After 30 mins, 1M sodium hydroxide (1 mL) and water (1 mL) were slowly added to the reaction mixture, and the resulting mixture was stirred at room temperature for 3 h. The aqueous mixture was extracted with ethyl acetate (3×5 mL) and the combined organic layers were dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and the solvent removed in vacuo to give the title compound, which was used without further purification.

Preparation 31 (2-Thien-3-ylphenyl)carbamic Acid 1-[2-(2-Chloro-4-formyl-5-methoxyphenylcarbamoyl)ethyl]piperidin-4-yl Ester

To a solution of the product of Preparation 30 (0.37 mmol) in dichloromethane (3.7 mL) was added dimethyl sulfoxide (158 μL, 2.22 mmol) and diisopropylethylamine (193 μL, 1.11 mmol). This mixture was cooled to 0° C. and after 15 min, sulfur trioxide pyridine complex (176 mg, 1.11 mmol) was added. After 1 h, the reaction mixture was quenched by adding water (3 mL). The layers were separated and the organic layer was dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and the solvent removed in vacuo to give the title compound, which was used without further purification. MS (m/z): [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₂₇H₂₈ClN₃O₅S, 542.14; found, 542.5.

Preparation 32 (2-Thien-3-ylphenyl)carbamic Acid 1-[2-(4-{[(R)-2-(tert-butyldimethylsilanyloxy)-2-(8-hydroxy-2-oxo-1,2-dihydroquinolin-5-yl)ethylamino]methyl}-2-chloro-5-methoxyphenylcarbamoyl)ethyl]piperidin-4-yl Ester

A solution of the product of Preparation 31 (200 mg, 0.37 mmol) and the product of Preparation 4 (146 mg, 0.37 mmol) in a mixture of dichloromethane (1.85 mL) and methanol (1.85 mL) was stirred at room temperature for 30 min. Sodium triacetoxyborohydride (235 mg, 1.11 mmol) was added and the resulting mixture was stirred at room temperature. After 12 h, the reaction was incomplete as determined by mass spectrometry. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure and the resulting residue dissolved in ethanol (3.7 mL) and sodium borohydride (28 mg, 0.74 mmol) was added. After stirring for 2 h at room temperature, the reaction was quenched with acetic acid (about 1.0 mL). The solvent was removed in vacuo to give the title compound, which was used without further purification. MS (m/z): [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₄₄H₅₄ClN₅O₇SSi, 860.32; found, 860.6.

Example 6 (2-Thien-3-ylphenyl)carbamic Acid 1-[2-(2-Chloro-4-{[(R)-2-hydroxy-2-(8-hydroxy-2-oxo-1,2-dihydroquinolin-5-yl)ethylamino]methyl}-5-methoxyphenylcarbamoyl)-ethyl]piperidin-4-yl Ester

To a stirred solution of the product of Preparation 32 (318 mg, 0.37 mmol) in dichloromethane (3.7 mL) was added triethylamine trihydrofluoride (181 μL, 1.11 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 24 h and then the mixture was concentrated in vacuo. The resulting residue was dissolved in a mixture of N,N-dimethylformamide (0.5 mL), acetic acid/water (1:1, 3 mL), and this mixture was purified by reverse phase prep-HPLC to give the title compound as the ditrifluoroacetate salt (60 mg). MS (m/z): [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₃₈H₄₀ClN₅O₇S, 746.23; found, 746.5. Retention time (HPLC 10−70)=2.71.

Preparation 33 N-{2-Benzyloxy-5-[(R)-2-bromo-1-(tert-butyldimethylsilanyloxy)ethyl]phenyl}-formamide

(R)-2-Bromo-1-(3-formamido-4-benzyloxyphenyl)ethanol (9.9 g, 28 mmol) was dissolved in dimethylformamide (36 mL). Imidazole (2.3 g, 34 mmol) and tert-butyldimethylsilyl chloride (4.7 g, 31 mmol) were added. The solution was stirred under nitrogen for 72 h. Additional imidazole (0.39 g, 5.7 mmol) and tert-butyldimethylsilyl chloride (0.64 g, 4.3 mmol) were added and the reaction was stirred for an additional 20 h. The reaction mixture was then diluted with a mixture of isopropyl acetate (53 mL) and hexanes (27 mL) and transferred to a separatory funnel. The organic layer was washed twice with a mixture of water (27 mL) and saturated aqueous sodium chloride (27 mL), followed by a final wash with saturated aqueous sodium chloride (27 mL). The organic layer was dried over sodium sulfate. Silica gel (23.6 g) and hexanes (27 mL) were added and the suspension was stirred for 10 min. The solids were removed by filtration and the filtrate concentrated under vacuum. The residue was crystallized from hexanes (45 mL) to afford 8.85 g (19 mmol, 68%) of the title compound as a solid. MS m/z: [M+H⁺] calcd for C₂₂H₃₀NO₃SiBr 464.1; found 464.2.

The starting material, (R)-2-bromo-1-(3-formamido-4-benzyloxyphenyl)ethanol, can be prepared as described in U.S. Pat. No. 6,268,533 B1; or R. Hett et al., Organic Process Research and Development, 1998, 2:96-99; or using procedures similar to those described in Hong et al., Tetrahedron Lett., 1994, 35:6631; or similar to those described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,495,054.

By using this compound as a starting material in the examples described herein, additional compounds of this invention can be prepared.

Preparation 34 6-(2-Bromo-(R)-1-tert-butyldimethylsilyloxy)ethyl-2,2-dimethyl-1,3-benzodioxan (a) 6-Bromo-2,2-dimethyl-4H-benzo[1,3]dioxine

To 5-bromo-2-hydroxybenzyl alcohol (93 g, 0.46 mol, available from Sigma-Aldrich) in 2.0 L of 2,2-dimethoxypropane was added 700 mL of acetone, followed by zinc chloride (170 g). After stirring for 18 hours, 1.0 M aqueous sodium hydroxide was added until the aqueous phase was basic. Diethyl ether (1.5 L) was added to the slurry and the organic phase was decanted into a separatory funnel. The organic phase was washed with brine, dried over Na₂SO₄, filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure to give the title compound as an oil.

(b) 6-Acetyl-2,2-dimethyl-4H-benzol[1,3]dioxine

To the product of step (a) (110 g, 0.46 mol) in 1.0 L of THF at −78° C. was added 236 mL (0.51 mol) of 2.14 M n-butyllithium in hexanes via a dropping funnel. After 30 minutes, N-methyl-N-methoxy acetamide (71 g, 0.69 mol, available from TCI) was added. After 2 hours, the reaction mixture was quenched with water, diluted with 2.0 L of 1.0 M aqueous phosphate buffer (pH=7.0) and extracted once with diethyl ether. The diethyl ether phase was washed once with brine, dried over Na₂SO₄, filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure to give a light orange oil. The oil was dissolved in a minimum volume of ethyl acetate, diluted with hexanes, and to give the title compound as a crystalline solid.

(c) 6-Bromoacetyl-2,2-dimethyl-4H-benzo[1,3]dioxine

To the product of step (b) (23.4 g, 0.113 mol) in 600 mL of THF at −78° C. was added 135 mL of 1.0 M sodium hexamethyldisilazane in THF (Sigma-Aldrich). After 1 hour, trimethylsilyl chloride (15.8 mL, 0.124 mol) was added. After another 30 minutes, bromine (5.82 mL, 0.113 mol) was added. After 10 minutes, the reaction was quenched by diluting the reaction mixture with diethyl ether and pouring it onto 500 mL of 5% aqueous Na₂SO₃ premixed with 500 mL of 5% aqueous NaHCO₃. The phases were separated and the organic phase was washed with brine, dried over Na₂SO₄, filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure to give the title compound as an oil that solidified upon storage in the freezer.

(d) (R)-2-Bromo-1-(2,2-dimethyl-4H-benzo[1,3]dioxin-6-yl)ethanol

To the product of step (c) (10 g, 35.1 mmol) in 100 mL of THF was added the solid catalyst of Preparation 13, step (c)(1) (0.97 g, 3.5 mmol). The solution was cooled to between −20° C. and −10° C. and BH₃-THF (35 mL, 35 mmol) diluted with 50 mL THF was added dropwise via a dropping funnel. After the addition was complete, the reaction mixture was allowed to warm to ambient temperature. After 30 minutes, the reaction mixture was quenched by slow addition of 50 mL of methanol and then concentrated to a thick oil. The oil was purified by silica gel chromatography eluted with 1:2 ethyl acetate/hexanes. The fractions were combined and concentrated to give the title compound as an off-white solid.

(e) [(R)-2-Bromo-1-(2,2-dimethyl-4H-benzo[1,3]dioxin-6-yl)ethoxy]-tert-butyldimethylsilane

To the product of step (d) (10 g, 34.8 mmol) and imidazole (4.7 g, 69.7 mmol) dissolved in 100 mL DMF was added tert-butyldimethylsilyl chloride (5.78 g, 38.3 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred for 18 hours. The reaction mixture was then partitioned between 200 mL of saturated sodium chloride and 200 mL of diethyl ether. The aqueous layer was extracted with 200 mL of diethyl ether. The organic layers were then combined, washed with saturated sodium chloride (3×100 mL), dried over MgSO₄ and concentrated. The product was purified by silica gel chromatography, eluting with hexanes followed by 5% ethyl acetate in hexanes. The desired fractions were combined and concentrated to give the title compound as an oil.

By using this compound as a starting material in the examples described herein, additional compounds of this invention can be prepared.

Preparation 35 2-(4-Methyl-1,3-thiazol-2-yl)phenylcarbamic Acid Piperidin-4-ylmethyl Ester Hydrochloride

The title compound is prepared by the procedures described in WO 2004/012684, published on Feb. 12, 2004. By using this compound (or other related thiazole compounds described in WO 2004/012684) as a starting material in the examples described herein, additional compounds of this invention can be prepared.

Example 7 [2-(4-Methyl-1,3-thiazol-2-yl)phenyl]carbamic Acid 1-{9-[(R)-2-Hydroxy-2-(8-hydroxy-2-oxo-1,2-dihydroquinolin-5-yl)ethylamino]nonyl}piperidin-4-ylmethyl Ester

Using the product of Preparation 35 and following the procedures described in Preparation 7 and Example I, the title compound is prepared.

Preparation 36 (2-Bromophenyl)carbamic Acid 1-{9-[(R)-2-(tert-Butyldimethylsilanyloxy)-2-(8-hydroxy-2-oxo-1,2-dihydroquinolin-5-yl)ethylamino]nonyl}piperidin-4-yl Ester

The product of Preparation 7(500 mg, 1.03 mmol) was dissolved in a 1:1 mixture of acetonitrile (00 mL) and aqueous hydrochloric acid (6N, 10 mL) and the resulting mixture was heated at 50° C. for 1 hour. The reaction mixture was then diluted with brine and this mixture was extracted twice with dichloromethane. The organic layer was dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure.

The residue was dissolved in a 1: I mixture of dichloromethane (5 mL) and methanol (5 mL) and to this solution was added the product of Preparation 4 (400 mg, 1.03 mmol) and sodium triacetoxyborohydride (633 mg, 3 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight and then concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was dissolved in a 1:1 mixture of acetic acid (5 mL) and water (5 mL) and this mixture was purified by reverse phase preparative HPLC to afford the title compound as a white lyophilized solid (404 mg). LCMS m/z: 759.5 (MH⁺).

Using the title compound and various heteroaryl boronic acid compounds, additional compounds of this invention can be prepared. See, by way of illustration, Example 8 below.

Example 8 (2-Thien-3-ylphenyl)carbamic Acid 1-{9-[(R)-2-Hydroxy-2-(8-hydroxy-2-oxo-1,2-dihydroquinolin-5-yl)ethylamino]nonyl}piperidin-4-yl Ester

A solution of the product of Preparation 36 (400 μL, 0.1 mmol) in N,N-dimethylformamide was added to a 4 mL vial containing 3-thiopheneboronic acid (20 mg, 0.15 mmol). To this mixture was added aqueous potassium carbonate (4 M, 100 μL, 0.4 mmol) and then, after flushing the vial with nitrogen, [1,1′-bis(diphenylphosphino)-ferrocene]dichloropalladium(II) (catalytic amount) was added. The vial was sealed and heated on a shaker block at 90° C. overnight. The solvent was then evaporated and the residue was suspended in a 1:1 mixture of acetonitrile (11 mL) and aqueous hydrochloric acid (6N, 1 mL) and this mixture was heated for 2 hours at 50° C. The solvent was then evaporated and the residue was dissolved in a mixture of acetonitrile/water/trifluoroacetic acid (1:1:0.05, 1 mL), filtered and purified by parallel reverse phase column chromatography to afford title compound as a ditrifluoroacetate salt (1.6 mg).

Preparation 37 2-(2-Methoxy-4-nitrophenyl)-1,3-dioxolane

To a stirred solution of 2-methoxy-4-nitro-benzaldehyde (4.61 g, 25.4 mmol) in toluene (51 mL), was added p-toluene sulfonic acid (483 mg, 2.54 mmol), followed by ethylene glycol (2.83 mL, 50.8 mmol). After heating the reaction mixture at 50° C. for 12 h, additional p-toluene sulfonic acid (483 mg, 2.54 mmol) and ethylene glycol (2.83 mL, 50.8 mmol) were added. After an additional 12 h, the solvent was removed under reduced pressure, and the resulting residue was dissolved in dichloromethane (50 mL). The organic layer was washed with saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate solution (25 mL), dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and the solvent removed under reduced pressure to give the title compound as a yellow solid (5.46 g, 95%).

Preparation 38 2-(2-Methoxy-4-aminophenyl)-1,3-dioxolane

Nitrogen was bubbled through a stirred solution of the product of Preparation 37 (100 mg, 0.44 mmol) and sodium bicarbonate (7.4 mg, 0.09 mmol) in tetrahydrofuran/ethanol (1:1, 4.4 mL) for 15 min. Platinum oxide (5 mg, 0.02 mmol) was added and the reaction mixture was placed under a hydrogen atmosphere for 2 h. The reaction mixture was filtered through a Celite pad and the pad was washed with ethanol. The solvent was then removed under reduced pressure to give the title compound as a yellow oil (90 mg, 100%).

Preparation 39 N-[4-(1,3-Dioxolan-2-yl)-3-methoxyphenyl]acrylamide

To a stirred solution of the product of Preparation 38 (86 mg, 0.44 mmol) and DIPEA (169 μL, 0.97 mmol) in dichloromethane (10 mL, 0.5 M) at 0° C. was added acryloyl chloride (43 μL, 0.53 mmol). The reaction mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature slowly. After 4 h, the organic layer was washed with saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate solution (5 mL), dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and the solvent removed under reduced pressure to give the title compound which was used without further purification.

Preparation 40 (2-Thiophen-3-ylphenyl)carbamic Acid 1-[2-(4-[1,3]Dioxolan-2-yl-3-methoxyphenylcarbamoyl)ethyl]piperidin-4-yl Ester

The product of Preparation 39 (110 mg, 0.44 mmol) and the product of Preparation 26 (133 mg, 0.44 mmol) were stirred together in a mixture of dichloromethane and methanol (1:1, 1.47 mL) at 50° C. for 24 h. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure to give the title compound, which was used without further purification.

Preparation 41 (2-Thiophen-3-ylphenyl)carbamic Acid 1-[2-(4-Formyl-3-methoxyphenylcarbamoyl)-ethyl]piperidin-4-yl ester

A stirred solution of the product of Preparation 40 (242 mg, 0.44 mmol) in 1M hydrochloric acid in acetonitrile (1:1, 2 mL) was heated at 50° C. for 2 h. The reaction mixture was then diluted with dichloromethane and made basic with solid sodium bicarbonate. The organic layer was separated, dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and the solvent was removed under reduced pressure to give the title compound which was used without further purification. MS (m/z): [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₂₇H₂₉N₃O₅S, 508.18; found, 508.4.

Preparation 42 (2-Thiophen-3-ylphenyl)carbamic Acid 1-[2-(4-{[(R)-2-(tert-Butyldimethylsilanyloxy)-2-(8-hydroxy-2-oxo-1,2-dihydroquinolin-5-yl)ethylamino]m ethyl}-3-methoxyphenylcarbamoyl)ethyl]piperidin-4-yl Ester

A solution of the product of Preparation 41 (224 mg, 0.44 mmol) and the product of Preparation 4 (173 mg, 0.44 mmol) in a mixture of dichloromethane (2.2 mL) and methanol (2.2 mL) was stirred at room temperature for 30 min and then sodium triacetoxyborohydride (280 mg, 1.32 mmol) was added. After 12 h, the reaction was complete by mass spectrometry and the solvent was removed under reduced pressure to give the title compound, which was used without further purification. MS (m/z): [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₄₄H₅₅N₅O₇SSi, 826.36; found, 826.5.

Example 9 (2-Thiophen-3-ylphenyl)carbamic Acid 1-[2-(4-{[(R)-2-Hydroxy-2-(8-hydroxy-2-oxo-1,2-dihydroquinolin-5-yl)ethylamino]methyl}-3-methoxyphenylcarbamoyl)ethyl]-piperidin-4-yl Ester

To a stirred solution of the product of Preparation 42 (363 mg, 0.44 mmol) in 10% N,N-dimethylformamide in dichloromethane (4.4 mL) was added triethylamine trihydrofluoride (215 μL, 1.32 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 24 h and then the solvent was removed under reduced pressure. The resulting residue was dissolved in a mixture of N,N-dimethylformamide (0.5 mL) and acetic acid/water (1:1, 3 mL), and purified by preparative HPLC to give the title compound as a ditrifluoroacetate salt (50 mg). Retention time (HPLC 10-70)=2.68.

Preparation 43 (2-Thiazol-2-ylphenyl)carbamic Acid Piperidin-4-yl Ester (a) 4-[2-(4,4,5,5-Tetramethyl[1,3,2]dioxaborolan-2-yl)phenylcarbamoyloxy]-piperidine-1-carboxylic Acid tert-Butyl Ester

To the product of Preparation 26, step (a) (19.72 g, 49.4 mmol) dissolved in ethylene glycol dimethyl ether (120 mL) was added bis(pinacolato)diboron (12.54 g, 49.4 mmol), potassium acetate (12.12 g, 123 mmol) and [1,1-bis(diphenylphosphino)ferrocene]dichloropalladium(II) (4.03 g, 4.94 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred for about 15 h at 90° C. under nitrogen and then the solvent was removed under reduced pressure. The crude was dissolved in dichloromethane (250 mL) and washed with brine (1×200 mL) and water (1×200 mL). The organic phase was dried over sodium sulfate, filtered through a pad of Celite, and concentrated under reduced pressure to provide a crude residue (36.7 g). The residue was chromatographed over silica gel eluting with 10%-25% ethyl acetate:hexane, to give the title compound as a light brown foam (12.5 g). MS m/z: [M+H⁺] calcd for C₂₃H₃₅BN₂O₆ 447.26; found 447.0.

(b) 4-(2-Thiazol-2-ylphenylcarbamoyloxy)piperidine-1-carboxylic Acid tert-Butyl Ester

To a flask were added the product of step (a) (6.28 g, 14.1 mmol), 2-bromothiazole (2.77 g, 16.9 mmol) and potassium carbonate (3.89 g, 28.1 mmol). The flask was flushed with nitrogen gas and a mixture of ethylene glycol dimethyl ether (80 mL) and N,N-dimethylformamide (20 mL) was added, followed by tetrakis(triphenylphosphine) palladium (3.89 g, 1.4 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred overnight at about 90-95° C. and then concentrated under reduced pressure. The crude product was dissolved in dichloromethane (150 mL) and washed with water (3×). The organic phase was dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated under reduce pressure to give the title compound as a reddish brown oil (7.77 g). MS m/z: [M+H⁺] calcd for C₂₀H₂₅N₃O₄S 404.16; found 404.5.

(c) (2-Thiazol-2-ylphenyl)carbamic Acid Piperidin-4-yl Ester

The product of step (b) (7.7 g, 19 mmol) was stirred in a mixture of dichloromethane (25 mL) and trifluoroacetic acid (10 mL) for 1.5 hours. Toluene was added (to form an azeotropic mixture) and the mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure. The crude residue was purified by column chromatography (7% methanol: dichloromethane with 1% ammonium hydroxide) to give the title compound (2.36 g, 90% purity). MS m/z: [M+H⁺] calcd for C_(‥)H₁₇N₃O₂S 304.10; found 304.3.

Example 10 (2-Thiazol-2-ylphenyl)carbamic Acid 1-[2-(4{[(R)-2-Hydroxy-2-(8-hydroxy-2-oxo-1,2-dihydroquinolin-5-yl)ethylamino]methyl}-3-methoxyphenylcarbamoyl)ethyl]-piperidin-4-yl Ester

Using the product of Preparation 43, and following the procedures described in Preparations 37-42 and Example 9, the title compound was prepared as a ditrifluoroacetate salt (123 mg). MS m/z: [M+H⁺] calcd for C₃₇H₄₀N₆O₇S 713.27; found 713.7.

Preparation 44 [2-(4-Bromothiazol-2-yl)phenyl]carbamic Acid Piperidin-4-yl Ester (a) 4-[2-(4-Bromothiazol-2-yl)phenylcarbamoyloxy]piperidine-1-carboxylic Acid tert-Butyl Ester

The product of Preparation 43, step (a) (6.22 g, 13.9 mmol), 2,4-dibromothiazole (3.55 g, 14.6 mmol) and potassium carbonate (3.85 g, 27.9 mmol) were dissolved in a mixture of ethylene glycol dimethyl ether (112.5 mL) and N,N-dimethylformamide (14 mL) and tetrakis(triphenylphosphine) palladium (805 mg, 0.697 mmol) was added. The reaction mixture was stirred overnight at 90° C. Ethyl acetate was added (to form an azeotropic mixture) and the mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure. The crude product was dissolved in ethyl acetate (200 mL) and washed with water (2×150 mL). The organic phase was dried over sodium sulfate, filtered through a pad of Celite and concentrated under vacuum.

Analytical analysis indicated that about 50% starting material remained, so the crude residue was again combined with 2,4-dibromothiazole (888 mg, 3.5 mmol) and potassium carbonate (1.93 g, 14.0 mmol) and dissolved in a mixture of ethylene glycol dimethyl ether (80 mL) and N,N-dimethylformamide (20 mL) and tetrakis(triphenylphosphine) palladium (805 mg, 0.70 mmol) was added. The reaction mixture was stirred overnight at 90° C. Ethyl acetate was added (to form an azeotropic mixture) and this mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure. The crude product was dissolved in ethyl acetate (200 mL) and washed with water (2×150 mL), dried over sodium sulfate, filtered through a pad of Celite and concentrated under reduced pressure to give the title compound (8.9 g). LCMS m/z: 484.3 (MH⁺). MW: 482.39. MS m/z: [M+H⁺] calcd for C₂₀H₂₄BrN₃O₄S 482.07; found 484.3.

(b) [2-(4-Bromothiazol-2-yl)phenyl]carbamic Acid Piperidin-4-yl Ester

The product of step (a) (8.9 g crude, approximately 13.9 mmol) was dissolved in dichloromethane (6 mL). Trifluoroacetic acid (8 mL) in dichloromethane (110 mL) was slowly added and the resulting mixture was stirred at room temperature. After 2.5 h, the solution was concentrated under reduced pressure. Toluene was added (to form a azeotropic mixture) and this mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure. This process was repeated several times and then the residue was dissolved in dichloromethane (200 mL) and washed twice with a 1:1 mixture of brine and 1.0 M sodium hydroxide (150 mL). The organic phase was dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated under vacuum. The residue was chromatographed over silica gel eluting with 7% methanol in dichloromethane containing 1% ammonium hydroxide to give the title compound as a dark brown solid (2.75 g). MS m/z: [M+H⁺] calcd for C₁₅H₁₆BrN₃O₂S 382.01; found 382.0.

Example 11 [2-(4-Bromothiazol-2-yl)phenyl]carbamic Acid 1-[2-(4-{[(R)-2-Hydroxy-2-(8-hydroxy-2-oxo-1,2-dihydroquinolin-5-yl)ethylamino]methyl}-3-methoxyphenylcarbamoyl)-ethyl]piperidin-4-yl Ester

Using the product of Preparation 44, and following the procedures described in Preparations 37-42 and Example 9, the title compound was prepared as a ditrifluoroacetate salt (117 mg). MS m/z: [M+H⁺] calcd for C₃₇H₃₉BrN₆O₇S 791.18; found 791.5.

Preparation 45 [2-(4-Methylthiazol-2-yl)phenyl]carbamic Acid Piperidin-4-yl Ester (a) 4-Methyl-2-(2-nitrophenyl)-1,3-thiazole

A solution of 4-methylthiazole (4.0 g, 40.33 mmol) in THF (80 mL) was cooled to −78° C. under nitrogen. n-Butyl lithium (20.4 mL of 2M in hexanes, 40.8 mmol) was added to the reaction mixture slowly over 3 minutes. The reaction mixture was stirred for about 1.5 hours at −78° C., and then 2-fluoronitrobenzene (6.24 g, 44.23 mmol) was added. After stirring at −78° C. for another 30 minutes, the reaction mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature. The reaction mixture was stirred for about 2 hours at room temperature and then the reaction was quenched with water (70 mL). The mixture was extracted with ethyl acetate and the combined organic layers were washed with brine (10 mL), dried (MgSO₄), filtered and concentrated. The product was isolated by silica gel chromatography (5-10% ethyl acetate in hexanes) to give the title compound as an orange/brown oil (1.5 g). MS m/z: [M+H⁺] calcd for C₁₀H₈N₂O₂S 221.03; found 221. Retention time (HPLC 2-90)=4.54

(b) 4-Methyl-2-(2-aminophenyl)-1,3-thiazole

Hydrogen gas was bubbled through a solution of the product of step (b) (1.5 g, 6.8 mmol) in a mixture of ethanol (60 mL) and water (20 mL) containing 5M hydrochloric acid (1.5 mL) for 15 minutes. Palladium on activated carbon (500 mg, 10% Pd on carbon, ˜50% weight water) was added, and the reaction mixture was stirred overnight at room temperature under a balloon of hydrogen gas. The reaction mixture was filtered through Celite, concentrated, and purified by silica gel chromatography (5-10% ethyl acetate in hexanes) to give the title compound as a yellow/black oil (1.2 g). MS m/z: [M+H⁺] calcd for C₁₀H₁₀N₂S 191.06; found 191.3. Retention time (HPLC 2-90)=3.89; thin layer chromatography: (10% ethyl acetate in hexanes) R_(f)=0.36.

(c) [2-(4-Methylthiazol-2-yl)phenyl]carbamic Acid Piperidin-4-yl Ester

To a solution of triphosgene (350 mg, 1.185 mmol) in THF (3 mL) at 0° C. under nitrogen was added 4-N-Boc-piperidinol (476 mg, 2.37 mmol), followed by N,N-diisopropylethylamine (0.6 mL, 3.44 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred for 1 h at 0° C. then allowed to warm to room temperature. The reaction mixture was stirred for 20 minutes at room temperature and then cooled to 0° C. To the reaction mixture was added a solution of the product of step (b) (450 mg, 2.37 mmol) in THF (10 mL) and N,N-diisopropylethylamine (0.6 mL, 3.44 mmol) at 0° C. The resulting mixture was stirred at 0° C. for 2 h and then heated at 40° C. for 4 h. The mixture was then allowed to cool to room temperature and quenched with 1:1 water:saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate solution. The layers were separated, and the aqueous layer was washed with dichloromethane (5 mL). The combined organic layers were dried (MgSO₄), filtered and concentrated. The resulting material was dissolved in dichloromethane (10 mL) and trifluoroacetic acid (1 mL), and this mixture was stirred for 2 h at room temperature. The reaction was neutralized with a saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate solution. The layers were separated, and the aqueous layer was extracted with ethyl acetate (3 mL). The combined organic layers were dried (MgSO₄), filtered, and concentrated to give the title compound (1.2 g). MS m/z: [M+H⁺] calcd for C₁₆H₁₉N₃O₂S 318.12; found 318.3. Retention time (HPLC 2-90)=3.71.

Example 12 [2-(4-Methylthiazol-2-yl)phenyl]carbamic Acid 1-[2-(4-{[(R)-2-Hydroxy-2-(8-hydroxy-2-oxo-1,2-dihydroquinolin-5-yl)ethylamino]methyl}phenylcarbamoyl)ethyl]-piperidin-4-yl Ester

The title compound was prepared following the procedures described in Preparations 37-42 and Example 9, with the following changes: in Preparation 37, 2-methoxy-4-nitrobenzaldehyde was replaced with 4-nitrobenzaldehyde; in Preparation 40, the product of Preparation 26 was replaced with the product of Preparation 45; in Preparation 41, the product of Preparation 40 in a mixture of dichloromethane and TFA (9:1, 10 mL) was kept at room temperature before diluting with dichloromethane and making basic with solid sodium bicarbonate; in the deprotection step of Preparation 42, the solvent used was 10% N,N-dimethylformamide in dichloromethane (1 mL), and the reaction mixture was stirred at about 30° C. for about 16 h and then isolated and purified to give the title compound as the ditrifluoroacetate salt. (18.5 mg). MS m/z: [M+H⁺] calcd for C₃₇H₄₀N₆O₆S 697.27; found 697.5.

Preparation 46 (2-Cyclohexylphenyl)carbamic Acid Piperidin-4-yl Ester (a) 1-Cyclohexyl-2-isocyanatobenzene

To a stirred solution of 2-cyclohexylbenzoic acid (2 g, 9.8 mmol) and DIPEA (3.45 μL, 14.7 mmol) in toluene (25 mL) under nitrogen was added diphenylphosphoryl azide (2.1 mL, 9.8 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred for 4 h at room temperature and then heated at 90° C. for 3 h. Upon cooling, the organic layer was washed with saturated ammonium chloride solution (2×10 mL) and brine (1×10 mL), dried (MgSO₄), filtered and the solvent removed under reduced pressure to give the title compound as a clear amber oil.

(b) 4-(2-Cyclohexylphenylcarbamoyloxy)piperidine-1-carboxylic Acid tert-Butyl Ester

A solution of the product of step (a) (˜9.8 mmol) and 4-hydroxypiperidine-1-carboxylic acid tert-butyl ester (2.4 g, 11.8 mmol) in DMF (19.7 mL) was stirred at room temperature for 24 h and then the solvent was removed under reduced pressure. The resulting residue was dissolved in ethyl acetate (20 mL) and this mixture was washed with 1N hydrochloric acid (2×10 mL), 1N aqueous sodium hydroxide (2×10 mL) and brine (10 mL), and then dried (MgSO₄), filtered and the solvent removed under reduced pressure. The resulting residue was purified by column chromatography to give the title compound.

(c) (2-Cyclohexylphenyl)carbamic Acid Piperidin-4-yl Ester

A stirred solution of the product of step (b) (3.22 g, 8.00 mmol) in 4 M hydrochloric acid in dioxane (40 mL) was heated at 50° C. After 8 h, the reaction mixture was allowed to cool to room temperature and the solvent was removed under reduced pressure to give the title compound. MS m/z: [M+H⁺] calcd for C₁₈H₂₆N₂O₂ 303.20; found 303.5. ¹H NMR (CD₃OD, δ): 7.2 (m, 4H), 4.95 (m, 1H), 4.85 (s, 1H), 3.3 (br m, 3H), 2.8 (br m, 1H), 2.2 (br m, 2H), 2.0 (br m, 2H), 1.8 (br m, 5H), 1.4 (br m, 5H).

Preparation 47 (2-Cyclohexylphenyl)carbamic Acid 1-(9-Hydroxynonyl)piperidin-4-yl Ester

To a stirred solution of the product of Preparation 46 (300 mg, 0.88 mmol) and triethylamine (270 μL, 1.94 mmol) in acetonitrile (2 mL) was added 9-bromononanol (237 mg, 1.06 mmol). The reaction mixture was heated at 50° C. overnight and then concentrated under reduced pressure. The resulting residue was dissolved in dichloromethane (10 mL) and this mixture was washed with aqueous sodium phosphate solution (2×5 mL) and brine (1×5 mL), and then dried (MgSO₄), filtered and the solvent removed under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by column chromatography (3-5% methanol:CHCl₃) to give the title compound as a yellow oil (257 mg, 66% yield).

Preparation 48 (2-Cyclohexylphenyl)carbamic Acid 1-{9-[(R)-2-(tert-Butyldimethylsilanyloxy)-2-(8-hydroxy-2-oxo-1,2-dihydroquinolin-5-yl)ethylamino]nonyl}piperidin-4-yl Ester

To a stirred solution of the product of Preparation 47 (257 mg, 0.58 mmol) in dichloromethane (3 mL) was added DIPEA (301 μL, 1.73 mmol) and DMSO (124 μL, 1.73 mmol). The reaction mixture was cooled to −10° C. and after 15 min, sulfur trioxide pyridine complex (276 mg, 1.73 mmol) was added. After 40 min, the reaction mixture was diluted with dichloromethane (10 mL) and washed with water (2×10 mL), aqueous sodium phosphate solution (2×5 mL) and brine (1×5 mL), and then dried (MgSO₄), filtered and the solvent removed under reduced pressure.

The resulting aldehyde was dissolved in a 1:1 mixture of dichloromethane and methanol (6 mL) and the product of Preparation 4 (275 mg, 0.7 mmol) was added. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 30 min and then sodium triacetoxyborohydride (344 mg, 1.7 mmol) was added. After stirring overnight, the reaction mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure to give the title compound, which was used without further purification.

Example 13 (2-Cyclohexylphenyl)carbamic Acid 1-{9-[(R)-2-Hydroxy-2-(8-hydroxy-2-oxo-1,2-dihydroquinolin-5-yl)ethylamino]nonyl}piperidin-4-yl Ester

A stirred solution of the product of Preparation 48 (441 mg, 0.58 mmol) in a mixture of 6 N hydrochloric acid and acetonitrile (1:1, 6 mL) was heated at 50° C. for 2 h. The reaction mixture was then concentrated under reduced pressure and the resulting residue was dissolved in acetonitrile:acetic acid (1:1, 5 mL) and purifying by preparative HPLC to afford the title compound as a ditrifluoroacetate salt (134 mg, 100% purity). MS m/z: [M+H⁺] calcd for C₃₈H₅₄N₄O₅ 647.41; found 647.8.

Preparation 49 2-(4-Bromophenyl)ethyl 4-Methylbenzenesulfonate

1,4-Diazabicyclo[2.2.2]octane (5.61 g, 0.050 mol) and 4-bromophenethyl alcohol (5.0 g, 0.025 mol) were combined in dichloromethane (100 mL). The resulting mixture was cooled to 0° C. in an ice bath and a solution of tosyl chloride (5.67 g, 0.029 mol) in dichloromethane (50 mL) was added via an addition funnel over 15 min. After stirring for about 1 h at 0° C., water (30 mL) was added and stirring was continued for another 30 min.

The aqeuous layer was then separated and discarded. The organic layer was dried (NaSO₂), filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure to give the title compound as a white solid.

Preparation 50 (2-Thiophen-2-ylphenyl)carbamic Acid 1-[2-(4-Bromophenyl)ethyl]piperidin-4-yl Ester

The product of Preparation 26 (0.146 g, 0.483 mmol/), the product of Preparation 49 (0.483 mmol/0.172 g), and N,N-diisopropylethylamine (0.252 mL, 1.5 mmol) were combined in acetonitrile (1.0 mL) and the resulting mixture was heated at 50° C. for about 12 h. The reaction mixture was allowed to cool to room temperature and the reaction was quenched with saturated sodium bicarbonate. The layers were separated and the aqueous layer was discarded. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried (NaSO₂), filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified on silica using 5% methanol/dichloromethane to give the title compound. MS m/z: [M+H⁺] calcd for C₂₄H₂₅BrN₂O₂S 485.08; found 487.3.

Preparation 51 (2-Thiophen-2-ylphenyl)carbamic Acid 1-{2-[4-(4-Hydroxy-but-1-ynyl)phenyl]ethyl}-piperidin-4-yl Ester

The product of Preparation 50 (0.247 g, 0.509 mmol) was dissolved in a mixture of N,N-diethylamine and N,N-dimethylformamide (2:1, 5 mL) and the resulting mixture was purged with nitrogen. Dichlorobis(triphenylphosphine)palladium(II) (0.072 g, 0.102 mmol), copper (1) iodide (0.006 g, 0.031 mmol) and but-3-yn-1-ol (0.036 mL, 0.474 mmol) were added under nitrogen. The resulting mixture was heated at 60° C. for about 12 h. The reaction mixture was then cooled to room temperature and quenched with saturated sodium bicarbonate. The layers were separated and the aqueous layer was discarded. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried (NaSO₂), filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified on silica using 5% methanol/dichloromethane to give the title compound. MS m/z: [M+H⁺] calcd for C₂₈H₃₀N₂O₃S 474.20; found 475.6.

Preparation 52 (2-Thiophen-2-ylphenyl)carbamic Acid 1-{2-[4-(4-Hydroxybutyl)phenyl]ethyl}-piperidin-4-yl Ester

The product of Preparation 51 (0.065 g, 0.136 mmol) was dissolved in methanol (20 mL) and palladium on activated carbon (10 wt. % (dry basis), 0.15 g) was added under nitrogen. The resulting suspension was placed under vacuum and then hydrogen was added under atmospheric pressure. After about 12 h, the suspension was filtered through Celite and the filtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure to give the title compound as a clear oil, which was used without further purification. MS m/z: [M+H⁺] calcd for C₂₈H₃₄N₂O₃S 479.23; found 479.5

Preparation 53 (2-Thiophen-2-ylphenyl)carbamic Acid 1-{2-[4-(4-Oxobutyl)phenyl]ethyl}piperidin-4-yl Ester

Sulfur trioxide pyridine complex (0.062 g, 0.392 mmol) was added to a solution of the product of Preparation 52 (0.047 g, 0.098 mmol), methyl sulfoxide (0.028 mL, 0.392 mmol) and N,N-diisopropylethylamine (0.068 mL, 0.392 mmol) in dichloromethane (5 mL) at 0° C. After stirring for about 4 h at 0° C., the reaction was quenched with 0.1 N hydrochloric acid (5 mL). The layers were separated and the aqueous layer was discarded. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried (NaSO₂), filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure to give the title compound as a yellow oil, which was used without further purification. MS m/z: [M+H⁺] calcd for C₂₈H₃₂N₂O₃S 477.21; found 477.4.

Example 14 (2-Thiophen-2-ylphenyl)carbamic Acid 1-[2-(4-{4-[(R)-2-Hydroxy-2-(8-hydroxy-2-oxo-1,2-dihydroquinolin-5-yl)ethylamino]butyl}phenyl)ethyl]piperidin-4-yl Ester

Following the procedures described in Preparation 42 and Example 9 (using the product of Preparation 53 in place of the product of Preparation 40 in Preparation 42), the title compound was prepared as a ditrifluoroacetate salt (25 mg). MS m/z: [M+H⁺] calcd for C₃₉H₄₄N₄O₅S 681.30; found 681.7.

Preparation A

Cell Culture and Membrane Preparation From Cells Expressing Human β₁, β₂ or β₃ Adrenergic Receptors

Chinese hamster ovarian (CHO) cell lines stably expressing cloned human β₁, β₂ or β₃ adrenergic receptors, respectively, were grown to near confluency in Hams F-12 media with 10% FBS in the presence of 500 μg/mL Geneticin. The cell monolayer was lifted with 2 mM EDTA in PBS. Cells were pelleted by centrifugation at 1,000 rpm, and cell pellets were either stored frozen at −80° C. or membranes were prepared immediately for use. For preparation of β₁ and β₂ receptor expressing membranes, cell pellets were re-suspended in lysis buffer (10 mM HEPES/HCl, 10 mM EDTA, pH 7.4 at 4° C.) and homogenized using a tight-fitting Dounce glass homogenizer (30 strokes) on ice. For the more protease-sensitive β₃ receptor expressing membranes, cell pellets were homogenated in lysis buffer (10 mM Tris/HCl, pH 7.4) supplemented with one tablet of “Complete Protease Inhibitor Cocktail Tablets with 2 mM EDTA” per 50 mL buffer (Roche Catalog No. 1697498, Roche Molecular Biochemicals, Indianapolis, Ind.). The homogenate was centrifuged at 20,000×g, and the resulting pellet was washed once with lysis buffer by re-suspension and centrifugation as above. The final pellet was then re-suspended in ice-cold binding assay buffer (75 mM Tris/HCl pH 7.4, 12.5 mM MgCl₂, 1 mM EDTA). The protein concentration of the membrane suspension was determined by the methods described in Lowry et al., 1951, Journal of Biological Chemistry, 193, 265; and Bradford, Analytical Biochemistry, 1976, 72, 248-54. All membranes were stored frozen in aliquots at −80° C. or used immediately.

Preparation B Cell Culture and Membrane Preparation From Cells Expressing Human M₁, M₂, M₃ and M₄ Muscarinic Receptors

CHO cell lines stably expressing cloned human hM₁, hM₂, hM₃ and hM₄ muscarinic receptor subtypes, respectively, were grown to near confluency in HAM's F-12 media supplemented with 10% FBS and 250 μg/mL Geneticin. The cells were grown in a 5% CO₂, 37° C. incubator and lifted with 2 mM EDTA in dPBS. Cells were collected by 5 minute centrifugation at 650×g, and cell pellets were either stored frozen at −80° C. or membranes were prepared immediately for use. For membrane preparation, cell pellets were resuspended in lysis buffer and homogenized with a Polytron PT-2100 tissue disrupter (Kinematica AG; 20 seconds×2 bursts). Crude membranes were centrifuged at 40,000×g for 15 minutes at 4° C. The membrane pellet was then resuspended with re-suspension buffer and homogenized again with the Polytron tissue disrupter. The protein concentration of the membrane suspension was determined by the method described in Lowry et al., 1951, Journal of Biochemistry, 193, 265. All membranes were stored frozen in aliquots at −80° C. or used immediately. Aliquots of prepared hM₅ receptor membranes were purchased directly from Perkin Elmer and stored at −80° C. until use.

Assay Test Procedure A Radioligand Binding Assay for Human β₁, β₂ and β₃ Adrenergic Receptors

Binding assays were performed in 96-well microtiter plates in a total assay volume of 100 μL with 10-15 μg of membrane protein containing the human β₁, β₂ or 133 adrenergic receptors in assay buffer (75 mM Tris/HCl pH 7.4 at 25° C., 12.5 mM MgCl₂, 1 mM EDTA, 0.2% BSA). Saturation binding studies for determination of K_(d) values of the radioligand were done using [³H]-dihydroalprenolol (NET-720, 100 Ci/mmol, PerkinElmer Life Sciences Inc., Boston, Mass.) for the β₁ and β₂ receptors and [¹²⁵I]-(−)-iodocyanopindolol (NEX-189, 220 Ci/mmol, PerkinElmer Life Sciences Inc., Boston, Mass.) at 10 or 11 different concentrations ranging from 0.01 nM to 20 nM. Displacement assays for determination of K_(i) values of test compounds were done with [³H]-dihydroalprenolol at 1 nM and [¹²⁵I]-(−)-iodocyanopindolol at 0.5 nM for 10 or 11 different concentrations of test compound ranging from 10 μM to 10 μM. Non-specific binding was determined in the presence of 10 μM propranolol. Assays were incubated for 1 hour at 37° C., and then binding reactions were terminated by rapid filtration over GF/B for the β₁ and β₂ receptors or GF/C glass fiber filter plates for the β₃ receptors (Packard BioScience Co., Meriden, Conn.) presoaked in 0.3% polyethyleneimine. Filter plates were washed three times with filtration buffer (75 mM Tris/HCl pH 7.4 at 4° C., 12.5 mM MgCl₂, 1 mM EDTA) to remove unbound radioactivity. The plates were then dried and 50 μL of Microscint-20 liquid scintillation fluid (Packard BioScience Co., Meriden, Conn.) was added and plates were counted in a Packard Topcount liquid scintillation counter (Packard BioScience Co., Meriden, Conn.). Binding data were analyzed by nonlinear regression analysis with the GraphPad Prism Software package (GraphPad Software, Inc., San Diego, Calif.) using the 3-parameter model for one-site competition. The curve minimum was fixed to the value for nonspecific binding, as determined in the presence of 10 μM propranolol. K_(i) values for test compounds were calculated from observed IC₅₀ values and the K_(d) value of the radioligand using the Cheng-Prusoff equation (Cheng Y, and Prusoff W H., Biochemical Pharmacology, 1973, 22, 23, 3099-108).

In this assay, a lower K_(i) value indicates that a test compound has a higher binding affinity for the receptor tested. Exemplified compound of this invention that were tested in this assay typically were found to have a K_(i) value of less than about 300 nM for the β₂ adrenergic receptor. For example, the compounds of Examples 1 and 2 were found to have K_(i) values of less than 10 nM.

If desired, the receptor subtype selectivity for a test compound can be calculated as the ratio of K_(i)(β₁)/K_(i)(β₂) or K_(i)(β₃)/K_(i)(β₂). Typically, compounds of this invention demonstrated greater binding at the β₂ adrenergic receptor compared to the β₁ or β₃ adrenergic receptor, i.e. K_(i)(β₁) or K_(i)(β₃) is typically greater than K_(i)(β₂). Generally, compounds having selectivity for the β₂ adrenergic receptor over the β₁ or β₃ adrenergic receptors are preferred; especially compounds having a selectivity greater than about 5. By way of example, the compounds of Examples 1 and 2 had a ratio of K_(i)(β₂)/K_(i)(β₂) greater than or equal to 5.

Assay Test Procedure B Radioligand Binding Assay for Muscarinic Receptors

Radioligand binding assays for cloned human muscarinic receptors were performed in 96-well microtiter plates in a total assay volume of 100 μL. CHO cell membranes stably expressing either the hM₁, hM₂, hM₃, hM₄ or hM₅ muscarinic subtype were diluted in assay buffer to the following specific target protein concentrations (μg/well): 10 μg for hM₁, 10-15 μg for hM₂, 10-20 μg for hM₃, 10-20 μg for hM₄, and 10-12 μg for hM₅ to get similar signals (cpm). The membranes were briefly homogenized using a Polytron tissue disruptor (10 seconds) prior to assay plate addition. Saturation binding studies for determining K_(D) values of the radioligand were performed using L-[N-methyl-³H]scopolamine methyl chloride ([³H]-NMS) (TRK666, 84.0 Ci/mmol, Amersham Pharmacia Biotech, Buckinghamshire, England) at concentrations ranging from 0.001 nM to 20 nM. Displacement assays for determination of K_(i) values of test compounds were performed with [³H]-NMS at 1 nM and eleven different test compound concentrations. The test compounds were initially dissolved to a concentration of 400 μM in dilution buffer and then serially diluted 5× with dilution buffer to final concentrations ranging from 10 μM to 100 μM. The addition order and volumes to the assay plates were as follows: 25 μL radioligand, 25 μL diluted test compound, and 50 μL membranes. Assay plates were incubated for 60 minutes at 37° C. Binding reactions were terminated by rapid filtration over GF/B glass fiber filter plates (PerkinElmer Inc., Wellesley, Mass.) pre-treated in 1% BSA. Filter plates were rinsed three times with wash buffer (10 mM HEPES) to remove unbound radioactivity. The plates were then air dried and 50 μL Microscint-20 liquid scintillation fluid (PerkinElmer Inc., Wellesley, Mass.) was added to each well. The plates were then counted in a PerkinElmer Topcount liquid scintillation counter (PerkinElmer Inc., Wellesley, Mass.). Binding data were analyzed by nonlinear regression analysis with the GraphPad Prism Software package (GraphPad Software, Inc., San Diego, Calif.) using the one-site competition model. K_(i) values for test compounds were calculated from observed IC₅₀ values and the K_(D) value of the radioligand using the Cheng-Prusoff equation (Cheng Y; Prusoff W H. (1973) Biochemical Pharmacology, 22(23):3099-108). K_(i) values were converted to pK_(i) values to determine the geometric mean and 95% confidence intervals. These summary statistics were then converted back to K_(i) values for data reporting.

In this assay, a lower K_(i) value indicates that the test compound has a higher binding affinity for the receptor tested. Exemplified compound of this invention that were tested in this assay typically were found to have a K_(i) value of less than about 300 nM for the M₃ muscarinic receptor. For example, the compounds of Examples 1 and 2 were found to have K_(i) values of less than 10 nM for the M₃ muscarinic receptor; and the compound of Example 3 was found to have K_(i) values of less than 150 nM for the M₃ muscarinic receptor.

Assay Test Procedure C

Whole-cell cAMP Flashplate Assay in CHO Cell Lines Heterologously Expressing Human β₁, β₂ or β₃ Adrenergic Receptors

cAMP assays were performed in a radioimmunoassay format using the Flashplate Adenylyl Cyclase Activation Assay System with [¹²⁵I]-cAMP (NEN SMP004, PerkinElmer Life Sciences Inc., Boston, Mass.), according to the manufacturers instructions. For the determination of β receptor agonist potency (EC₅₀), CHO-K1 cell lines stably expressing cloned human β₁, β₂ or β₃ adrenergic receptors were grown to near confluency in HAM's F-12 media supplemented with 10% FBS and Geneticin (250 μg/mL). Cells were rinsed with PBS and detached in dPBS (Dulbecco's Phosphate Buffered Saline, without CaCl₂ and MgCl₂) containing 2 mM EDTA or Trypsin-EDTA solution (0.05% trypsin/0.53 mM EDTA). After counting cells in Coulter cell counter, cells were pelleted by centrifugation at 1,000 rpm and re-suspended in stimulation buffer containing IBMX (PerkinElmer Kit) pre-warmed to room temperature to a concentration of 1.6×10⁶ to 2.8×10⁶ cells/mL. About 60,000 to 80,000 cells per well were used in this assay. Test compounds (10 mM in DMSO) were diluted into PBS containing 0.1% BSA in Beckman Biomek-2000 and tested at 11 different concentrations ranging from 100 μM to 1 pM. Reactions were incubated for 10 min at 37° C. and stopped by adding 100 μL of cold detection buffer containing [¹²⁵I]-cAMP (NEN SMP004, PerkinElmer Life Sciences, Boston, Mass.). The amount of cAMP produced (pmol/well) was calculated based on the counts observed for the samples and cAMP standards as described in the manufacturer's user manual. Data were analyzed by nonlinear regression analysis with the GraphPad Prism Software package (GraphPad Software, Inc., San Diego, Calif.) with the sigmoidal equation. The Cheng-Prusoff equation (Cheng Y, and Prusoff W H., Biochemical Pharmacology, 1973, 22, 23, 3099-108) was used to calculate the EC50 values.

In this assay, a lower EC₅₀ value indicates that the test compound has a higher functional activity at the receptor tested. Exemplified compound of this invention that were tested in this assay typically were found to have a EC₅₀ value of less than about 300 nM for the β₂ adrenergic receptor. For example, the compounds of Examples 1, 2 and 3 were found to have EC₅₀ values of less than 10 nM for the β₂ adrenergic receptor If desired, the receptor subtype selectivity for a test compound can be calculated as the ratio of EC₅₀(β₁)/EC₅₀(β₂) or EC₅₀(β₃)/EC₅₀(β₂). Typically, compounds of this invention demonstrated greater functional activity at the β₂ adrenergic receptor compared to the β₁ or β₃ adrenergic receptor, i.e. EC₅₀(β₁) or EC₅₀(β₃) is typically greater than EC₅₀(β₂). Generally, compounds having selectivity for the β₂ adrenergic receptor over the β₁ or β₃ adrenergic receptors are preferred; especially compounds having a selectivity greater than about 5; and in particular, greater than about 10. By way of example, the compounds of Examples 1, 2 and 3 had ratios of EC₅₀(β₁)/EC₅₀(β₂) greater than 10.

Assay Test Procedure D Functional Assays of Antagonism for Muscarinic Receptor Subtypes

A. Blockade of Agonist-Mediated Inhibition of cAMP Accumulation

In this assay, the functional potency of a test compound is determined by measuring the ability of the test compound to block oxotremorine-inhibition of forskolin-mediated cAMP accumulation in CHO-K1 cells expressing the hM₂ receptor. cAMP assays are performed in a radioimmunoassay format using the Flashplate Adenylyl Cyclase Activation Assay System with ²⁵¹I-cAMP (NEN SMP004B, PerkinElmer Life Sciences Inc., Boston, Mass.), according to the manufacturer's instructions. Cells are rinsed once with dPBS and lifted with Trypsin-EDTA solution (0.05% trypsin/0.53 mM EDTA) as described in the Cell Culture and Membrane Preparation section above. The detached cells are washed twice by centrifugation at 650×g for five minutes in 50 mL dPBS. The cell pellet is then re-suspended in 10 mL dPBS, and the cells are counted with a Coulter Z1 Dual Particle Counter (Beckman Coulter, Fullerton, Calif.). The cells are centrifuged again at 650×g for five minutes and re-suspended in stimulation buffer to an assay concentration of 1.6×10⁶−2.8×10⁶ cells/mL.

The test compound is initially dissolved to a concentration of 400 μM in dilution buffer (dPBS supplemented with 1 mg/mL BSA (0.1%)), and then serially diluted with dilution buffer to final molar concentrations ranging from 100 μM to 0.1 nM. Oxotremorine is diluted in a similar manner.

To measure oxotremorine inhibition of adenylyl cyclase (AC) activity, 25 μL forskolin (25 μM final concentration diluted in dPBS), 25 μL diluted oxotremorine, and 50 μL cells are added to agonist assay wells. To measure the ability of a test compound to block oxotremorine-inhibited AC activity, 25 μL forskolin and oxotremorine (25 μM and 5 μM final concentrations, respectively, diluted in dPBS), 25 μL diluted test compound, and 50 μL cells are added to remaining assay wells.

Reactions are incubated for 10 minutes at 37° C. and stopped by addition of 100 μL ice-cold detection buffer. Plates are sealed, incubated overnight at room temperature and counted the next morning on a PerkinElmer TopCount liquid scintillation counter (PerkinElmer Inc., Wellesley, Mass.). The amount of cAMP produced (pmol/well) is calculated based on the counts observed for the samples and cAMP standards, as described in the manufacturer's user manual. Data is analyzed by nonlinear regression analysis with the GraphPad Prism Software package (GraphPad Software, Inc., San Diego, Calif.) using the non-linear regression, one-site competition equation. The Cheng-Prusoff equation is used to calculate the K_(i), using the EC₅₀ of the oxotremorine concentration-response curve and the oxotremorine assay concentration as the K_(D) and [L], respectively.

In this assay, a lower K_(i) value indicates that the test compound has a higher functional activity at the receptor tested. When tested in this assay, compounds of this invention are expected to have a K_(i) value of less than about 300 nM for blockade of oxotremorine-inhibition of forskolin-mediated cAMP accumulation in CHO-K1 cells expressing the hM₂ receptor.

B. Blockade of Agonist-Mediated [³⁵S]GTPγS Binding

In a second functional assay, the functional potency of test compounds can be determined by measuring the ability of the compounds to block oxotremorine-stimulated [³⁵S]GTPγS binding in CHO-K1 cells expressing the hM₂ receptor.

At the time of use, frozen membranes are thawed and then diluted in assay buffer with a final target tissue concentration of 5-10 μg protein per well. The membranes are briefly homogenized using a Polytron PT-2100 tissue disrupter and then added to the assay plates.

The EC₉₀ value (effective concentration for 90% maximal response) for stimulation of [³⁵S]GTPγS binding by the agonist oxotremorine is determined in each experiment.

To determine the ability of a test compound to inhibit oxotremorine-stimulated [³⁵S]GTPγS binding, the following is added to each well of 96 well plates: 25 μL of assay buffer with [³⁵S]GTPγS (0.4 nM), 25 μL of oxotremorine (EC₉₀) and GDP (3 uM), 25 μL of diluted test compound and 25 μL CHO cell membranes expressing the hM₂ receptor. The assay plates are then incubated at 37° C. for 60 minutes. The assay plates are filtered over 1% BSA-pretreated GF/B filters using a PerkinElmer 96-well harvester. The plates are rinsed with ice-cold wash buffer for 3×3 seconds and then air or vacuum dried. Microscint-20 scintillation liquid (50 μL) is added to each well, and each plate is sealed and radioactivity counted on a Topcounter (PerkinElmer). Data are analyzed by nonlinear regression analysis with the GraphPad Prism Software package (GraphPad Software, Inc., San Diego, Calif.) using the non-linear regression, one-site competition equation. The Cheng-Prusoff equation is used to calculate the K_(i), using the IC₅₀ values of the concentration-response curve for the test compound and the oxotremorine concentration in the assay as the K_(D) and [L], ligand concentration, respectively.

In this assay, a lower K_(i) value indicates that the test compound has a higher functional activity at the receptor tested. When tested in this assay, compounds of this invention are expected to have a K_(i) value of less than about 300 nM for blockade of oxotremorine-stimulated [35S]GTPγS binding in CHO-K1 cells expressing the hM₂ receptor.

C. Blockade of Agonist-Mediated Calcium Release via FLIPR Assays

Muscarinic receptor subtypes (M₁, M₃ and M₅ receptors), which couple to G_(q) proteins, activate the phospholipase C (PLC) pathway upon agonist binding to the receptor. As a result, activated PLC hydrolyzes phosphatyl inositol diphosphate (PIP₂) to diacylglycerol (DAG) and phosphatidyl-1,4,5-triphosphate (IP₃), which in turn generates calcium release from intracellular stores, i.e., endoplasmic and sarcoplasmic reticulum. The FLIPR (Molecular Devices, Sunnyvale, Calif.) assay capitalizes on this increase in intracellular calcium by using a calcium sensitive dye (Fluo-4AM, Molecular Probes, Eugene, Oreg.) that fluoresces when free calcium binds. This fluorescence event is measured in real time by the FLIPR, which detects the change in fluorescence from a monolayer of cells cloned with human M₁ and M₃, and chimpanzee M₅ receptors. Antagonist potency can be determined by the ability of antagonists to inhibit agonist-mediated increases in intracellular calcium.

For FLIPR calcium stimulation assays, CHO cells stably expressing the hM₁, hM₃ and cM₅ receptors are seeded into 96-well FLIPR plates the night before the assay is done. Seeded cells are washed twice by Cellwash (MTX Labsystems, Inc.) with FLIPR buffer (10 mM HEPES, pH 7.4, 2 mM calcium chloride, 2.5 mM probenecid in Hank's Buffered Salt Solution (HBSS) without calcium and magnesium) to remove growth media and leaving 50 μL/well of FLIPR buffer. The cells are then incubated with 50 μL/well of 4 μM FLUO-4AM (a 2× solution was made) for 40 minutes at 37° C., 5% carbon dioxide. Following the dye incubation period, cells are washed two times with FLIPR buffer, leaving a final volume of 50 μL/well.

To determine antagonist potency, the dose-dependent stimulation of intracellular Ca²⁺ release for oxotremorine is first determined so that antagonist potency can later be measured against oxotremorine stimulation at an EC₉₀ concentration. Cells are first incubated with compound dilution buffer for 20 minutes, followed by agonist addition, which is performed by the FLIPR. An EC₉₀ value for oxotremorine is generated according to the method detailed in the FLIPR measurement and data reduction section below, in conjunction with the formula EC_(F)=((F/100-F)̂1/H)*EC₅₀. An oxotremorine concentration of 3×EC_(F) is prepared in stimulation plates such that an EC₉₀ concentration of oxotremorine is added to each well in the antagonist inhibition assay plates.

The parameters used for the FLIPR are: exposure length of 0.4 seconds, laser strength of 0.5 watts, excitation wavelength of 488 nm, and emission wavelength of 550 nm. Baseline is determined by measuring the change in fluorescence for 10 seconds prior to addition of agonist. Following agonist stimulation, the FLIPR continuously measured the change of fluorescence every 0.5 to I second for 1.5 minutes to capture the maximum fluorescence change.

The change of fluorescence is expressed as maximum fluorescence minus baseline fluorescence for each well. The raw data is analyzed against the logarithm of drug concentration by nonlinear regression with GraphPad Prism (GraphPad Software, Inc., San Diego, Calif.) using the built-in model for sigmoidal dose-response. Antagonist K_(i) values are determined by Prism using the oxotremorine EC₅₀ value as the K_(D) and the oxotremorine EC₉₀ for the ligand concentration according to the Cheng-Prusoff equation (Cheng & Prusoff, 1973).

In this assay, a lower K_(i) value indicates that the test compound has a higher functional activity at the receptor tested. When tested in this assay, compounds of this invention are expected to have a K_(i) value of less than about 300 nM for blockade of agonist-mediated calcium release in CHO cells stably expressing the hM₁, hM₃ and cM₅ receptors.

Assay Test Procedure E

Whole-cell cAMP Flashplate Assay With a Lung Epithelial Cell Line Endogenously Expressing Human β₂ Adrenergic Receptor

For the determination of agonist potencies and efficacies (intrinsic activities) in a cell line expressing endogenous levels of the β₂ adrenergic receptor, a human lung epithelial cell line (BEAS-2B) was used (ATCC CRL-9609, American Type Culture Collection, Manassas, Va.) (January B, et al., British Journal of Pharmacology, 1998, 123, 4, 701-11). Cells were grown to 75-90% confluency in complete, serum-free medium (LHC-9 MEDIUM containing Epinephrine and Retinoic Acid, cat #181-500, Biosource International, Camarillo, Calif.). The day before the assay, medium was switched to LHC-8 (no epinephrine or retinoic acid, cat #141-500, Biosource International, Camarillo, Calif.). cAMP assays were performed in a radioimmunoassay format using the Flashplate Adenylyl Cyclase Activation Assay System with [¹²⁵I]-cAMP (NEN SMP004, PerkinElmer Life Sciences Inc., Boston, Mass.), according to the manufacturers instructions. On the day of the assay, cells were rinsed with PBS, lifted by scraping with 5 mM EDTA in PBS, and counted. Cells were pelleted by centrifugation at 1,000 rpm and re-suspended in stimulation buffer pre-warmed to 37° C. at a final concentration of 600,000 cells/mL. Cells were used at a final concentration of 100,000 to 120,000 cells/well in this assay. Test compounds were serially diluted into assay buffer (75 mM Tris/HCl pH 7.4 at 25° C., 12.5 mM MgCl₂, 1 mM EDTA, 0.2% BSA) in Beckman Biomek-2000. Test compounds were tested in the assay at 11 different concentrations, ranging from 10 μM to 10 μM. Reactions were incubated for 10 min at 37° C. and stopped by addition of 100 μL of ice-cold detection buffer. Plates were sealed, incubated over night at 4° C. and counted the next morning in a Topcount scintillation counter (Packard BioScience Co., Meriden, Conn.). The amount of cAMP produced per mL of reaction was calculated based on the counts observed for samples and cAMP standards, as described in the manufacturer's user manual. Data were analyzed by nonlinear regression analysis with the GraphPad Prism Software package (GraphPad Software, Inc., San Diego, Calif.) using the 4-parameter model for sigmoidal dose-response.

In this assay, a lower EC₅₀ value indicates that the test compound has a higher functional activity at the receptor tested. Exemplified compound of this invention that were tested in this assay typically were found to have a EC₅₀ value of less than about 300 nM for the β₂ adrenergic receptor. For example, the compounds of Examples 1, 2 and 3 were found to have EC₅₀ values of less than 20 nM.

If desired, test compound efficacy (% Eff) was calculated from the ratio of the observed Emax (TOP of the fitted curve) and the maximal response obtained for isoproterenol dose response curve and was expressed as % Eff relative to isoproterenol. Exemplified compounds of this invention tested in this assay typically demonstrated a % Eff greater than about 40.

Assay Test Procedure F Duration of Bronchoprotection In Guinea Pig Models of Acetylcholine-Induced or Histamine-Induced Bronchoconstriction

These in vivo assays are used to assess the bronchoprotective effects of test compounds exhibiting both muscarinic receptor antagonist and β₂ adrenergic receptor agonist activity. To isolate muscarinic antagonist activity in the acetylcholine-induced bronchoconstriction model, the animals are administered propanolol, a compound that blocks β receptor activity, prior to the administration of acetylcholine. Duration of bronchoprotection in the histamine-induced bronchoconstriction model reflects β₂ adrenergic receptor agonist activity.

Groups of 6 male guinea pigs (Duncan-Hartley (HsdPoc:DH) Harlan, Madison, Wis.) weighing between 250 and 350 g are individually identified by cage cards. Throughout the study, animals are allowed access to food and water ad libitum.

Test compounds are administered via inhalation over 10 minutes in a whole-body exposure dosing chamber (R&S Molds, San Carlos, Calif.). The dosing chambers are arranged so that an aerosol is simultaneously delivered to 6 individual chambers from a central manifold. Guinea pigs are exposed to an aerosol of a test compound or vehicle (WFI). These aerosols are generated from aqueous solutions using an LC Star Nebulizer Set (Model 22F51, PARI Respiratory Equipment, Inc. Midlothian, Va.) driven by a mixture of gases (CO₂=5%, O₂=21% and N₂=74%) at a pressure of 22 psi. The gas flow through the nebulizer at this operating pressure is approximately 3 L/minute. The generated aerosols are driven into the chambers by positive pressure. No dilution air is used during the delivery of aerosolized solutions. During the 10 minute nebulization, approximately 1.8 mL of solution is nebulized. This value is measured gravimetrically by comparing pre- and post-nebulization weights of the filled nebulizer.

The bronchoprotective effects of test compounds administered via inhalation are evaluated using whole body plethysmography at 1.5, 24, 48 and 72 hours post-dose.

Forty-five minutes prior to the start of the pulmonary evaluation, each guinea pig is anesthetized with an intramuscular injection of ketamine (43.75 mg/kg), xylazine (3.50 mg/kg) and acepromazine (1.05 mg/kg). After the surgical site is shaved and cleaned with 70% alcohol, a 2-3 cm midline incision of the ventral aspect of the neck is made. Then, the jugular vein is isolated and cannulated with a saline-filled polyethylene catheter (PE-50, Becton Dickinson, Sparks, Md.) to allow for intravenous infusions of acetylcholine (Ach) or histamine in saline. The trachea is then dissected free and cannulated with a 14G teflon tube (#NE-014, Small Parts, Miami Lakes, Fla.). If required, anesthesia is maintained by additional intramuscular injections of the aforementioned anesthetic mixture. The depth of anesthesia is monitored and adjusted if the animal responds to pinching of its paw or if the respiration rate is greater than 100 breaths/minute.

Once the cannulations are completed, the animal is placed into a plethysmograph (#PLY114, Buxco Electronics, Inc., Sharon, Conn.) and an esophageal pressure cannula (PE-160, Becton Dickinson, Sparks, Md.) is inserted to measure pulmonary driving pressure (pressure). The teflon tracheal tube is attached to the opening of the plethysmograph to allow the guinea pig to breathe room air from outside the chamber. The chamber is then sealed. A heating lamp is used to maintain body temperature and the guinea pig's lungs are inflated 3 times with 4 mL of air using a 10 mL calibration syringe (#5520 Series, Hans Rudolph, Kansas City, Mo.) to ensure that the lower airways did not collapse and that the animal did not suffer from hyperventilation.

Once it was determined that baseline values are within the range of 0.3-0.9 mL/cm H₂O for compliance and within the range of 0.1-0.199 cm H₂O/mL per second for resistance, the pulmonary evaluation is initiated. A Buxco pulmonary measurement computer program enabled the collection and derivation of pulmonary values.

Starting this program initiated the experimental protocol and data collection. The changes in volume over time that occur within the plethysmograph with each breath are measured via a Buxco pressure transducer. By integrating this signal over time, a measurement of flow is calculated for each breath. This signal, together with the pulmonary driving pressure changes, which are collected using a Sensym pressure transducer (#TRD4100), is connected via a Buxco (MAX 2270) preamplifier to a data collection interface (#'s SFT3400 and SFT3813). All other pulmonary parameters are derived from these two inputs.

Baseline values are collected for 5 minutes, after which time the guinea pigs are challenged with Ach or histamine. When evaluating the muscarinic antagonist effects, propanolol (5 mg/Kg, iv) (Sigma-Aldrich, St. Louis, Mo.) is administered 15 minutes prior to challenge with Ach. Ach (Sigma-Aldrich, St. Louis, Mo.) (0.1 mg/mL) is infused intravenously for 1 minute from a syringe pump (sp210iw, World Precision Instruments, Inc., Sarasota, Fla.) at the following doses and prescribed times from the start of the experiment: 1.9 μg/minute at 5 minutes, 3.8 μg/minute at 10 minutes, 7.5 μg/minute at 15 minutes, 15.0 μg/minute at 20 minutes, 30 μg/minute at 25 minutes and 60 μg/minute at 30 minutes. Alternatively, bronchoprotection of test compounds is assessed in the acetylcholine challenge model without pretreatment with a beta blocking compound.

When evaluating the β₂ adrenergic receptor agonist effects of test compounds, histamine (25 μg/mL) (Sigma-Aldrich, St. Louis, Mo.) is infused intravenously for 1 minute from a syringe pump at the following doses and prescribed times from the start of the experiment: 0.5 μg/minute at 5 minutes, 0.9 μg/minute at 10 minutes, 1.9 μg/minute at 15 minutes, 3.8 μg/minute at 20 minutes, 7.5 μg/minute at 25 minutes and 15 μg/minute at 30 minutes. If resistance or compliance does not returned to baseline values at 3 minutes following each Ach or histamine dose, the guinea pig's lungs are inflated 3 times with 4 mL of air from a 10 mL calibration syringe. Recorded pulmonary parameters include respiration frequency (breaths/minute), compliance (mL/cm H₂O) and pulmonary resistance (cm H₂O/mL per second). Once the pulmonary function measurements are completed at minute 35 of this protocol, the guinea pig is removed from the plethysmograph and euthanized by carbon dioxide asphyxiation.

The data are evaluated in one of two ways:

(a) Pulmonary resistance (R_(L), cm H₂O/mL per second) is calculated from the ratio of “change in pressure” to “the change in flow.” The R_(L) response to ACh (60 μg/min, 1H) is computed for the vehicle and the test compound groups. The mean ACh response in vehicle-treated animals, at each pre-treatment time, is calculated and used to compute % inhibition of ACh response, at the corresponding pre-treatment time, at each test compound dose. Inhibition dose-response curves for ‘R_(L)’ were fitted with a four parameter logistic equation using GraphPad Prism, version 3.00 for Windows (GraphPad Software, San Diego, Calif.) to estimate bronchoprotective ID₅₀ (dose required to inhibit the ACh (60 μg/min) bronchocontrictor response by 50%). The equation used is as follows:

Y=Min+(Max−Min)/(1+10^(((log ID50-X)*Hillslope)))

where X is the logarithm of dose, Y is the response (% Inhibition of ACh induced increase in R_(L)). Y starts at Min and approaches asymptotically to Max with a sigmoidal shape.

(b) The quantity PD₂, which is defined as the amount of Ach or histamine needed to cause a doubling of the baseline pulmonary resistance, is calculated using the pulmonary resistance values derived from the flow and the pressure over a range of Ach or histamine challenges using the following equation (which was derived from an equation used to calculate PC₂₀ values described in American Thoracic Society. Guidelines for methacholine and exercise challenge testing—1999. Am J Respir Crit Care Med. 2000; 161: 309-329):

${PD}_{2} = {{antilog}\left\lbrack {{\log \; C_{1}} + \frac{\left( {{\log \; C_{2}} - {\log \; C_{1}}} \right)\left( {{2\; R_{0}} - R_{1}} \right)}{R_{2} - R_{1}}} \right\rbrack}$

where:

-   -   C₁=concentration of Ach or histamine preceding C₂     -   C₂=concentration of Ach or histamine resulting in at least a         2-fold increase in pulmonary resistance (R_(L))     -   R₀=Baseline R_(L) value     -   R₁═R_(L) value after C₁     -   R₂═R_(L) value after C₂

Statistical analysis of the data is performed using a two tailed—Students t-test. A P-value <0.05 was considered significant.

Exemplified compounds of this invention are expected to produce a dose-dependent bronchoprotective effect against MCh-induced bronchoconstriction and His-induced bronchoconstriction. Test compounds having a potency (ID₅₀ at 1.5 h post-dose) of less than about 300 μg/mL for ACh-induced bronchoconstriction and less than about 300 μg/mL for His-induced bronchoconstriction in this assay are generally preferred. Additionally, test compounds having a duration (PD T_(1/2)) of brochoprotective activity of at least about 24 hours in this assay are generally preferred.

Assay Test Procedure G Einthoven Model for Measuring Changes in Ventilation in Guinea Pigs

The bronchodilator activity of test compounds is evaluated in an anesthetized guinea pig model (the Einthoven model), which uses ventilation pressure as a surrogate measure of airway resistance. See, for example, Einthoven (1892) Pfugers Arch. 51: 367-445; and Mohammed et al. (2000) Pulm Pharmacol Ther. 13(6):287-92. In this model, muscarinic antagonist and β₂ agonist activity is assessed by determining the protective effects against methacholine (MCh) and histamine (His)-induced bronchoconstriction.

This assay is conducted using Duncan-Hartley guinea pigs (Harlan, Indianapolis, Ind.), weighing between 300 and 400 g.

The test compound or vehicle (i.e., sterile water) is dosed by inhalation (1H) over a 10 minute time period in a whole body exposure dosing chamber (R+S Molds, San Carlos, Calif.) using 5 mL of dosing solution. Animals are exposed to an aerosol, which is generated from an LC Star Nebulizer Set (Model 22F51, PARI Respiratory Equipment, Inc. Midlothian, Va.) driven by Bioblend a mixture of gasses (5% CO₂; 21% O₂; and 74% N₂) at a pressure of 22 psi. Pulmonary function is evaluated at various time-points after inhalation dosing.

Forty five minutes prior to the start of pulmonary function evaluation, the guinea pigs are anesthetized with an intramuscular (IM) injection of a mixture of ketamine (13.7 mg/kg/xylazine (3.5 mg/kg)/acepromazine (1.05 mg/kg). A supplemental dose of this mixture (50% of initial dose) is administered as needed. The jugular vein and carotid artery are isolated and cannulated with saline-filled polyethylene catheters (micro-renathane and PE-50, respectively, Beckton Dickinson, Sparks, Md.). The carotid artery is connected to a pressure transducer to allow the measurement of blood pressure and the jugular vein cannula is used for IV injection of either MCh or His. The trachea is then dissected free and cannulated with a 14G needle (#NE-014, Small Parts, Miami Lakes, Fla.). Once the cannulations are complete, the guinea pigs are ventilated using a respirator (Model 683, Harvard Apparatus, Inc., MA) set at a stroke volume of 1 mL/100 g body weight but not exceeding 2.5 mL volume, and at a rate of 100 strokes per minute. Ventilation pressure (VP) is measured in the tracheal cannula using a Biopac transducer that is connected to a Biopac (TSD 137C) pre-amplifier. Body temperature is maintained at 37° C. using a heating pad. Prior to initiating data collection, pentobarbital (25 mg/kg) is administered intraperitoneally (IP) to suppress spontaneous breathing and obtain a stable baseline. The changes in VP are recorded on a Biopac Windows data collection interface. Baseline values are collected for at least 5 minutes, after which time guinea pigs are challenged IV non-cumulatively with 2-fold incremental doses of the bronchoconstrictor (MCh or His). When MCh is used as the bronchoconstrictor agent, animals are pre-treated with propranolol (5 mg/kg, IV) to isolate the antimuscarinic effects of the test compound. Changes in VP are recorded using the Acknowledge Data Collection Software (Santa Barbara, Calif.). After the completion of study, the animals are euthanized.

Change in VP is measured in cm of water. Change in VP (cm H₂O)=peak pressure (after bronchoconstrictor challenge)—peak baseline pressure. The dose-response curve to MCh or His is fitted to a four parameter logistic equation using GraphPad Prism, version 3.00 for Windows (GraphPad Software, San Diego, Calif.). The equation used is as follows:

Y=Min+(Max−Min)/(1+10^(((log ID50-X)*Hillslope)))

where X is the logarithm of dose, Y is the response. Y starts at Min and approaches asymptotically to Max with a sigmoidal shape.

The percent inhibition of the bronchoconstrictor response to a submaximal dose of MCh or His is calculated at each dose of the test compound using the following equation: % Inhibition of response=100−((peak pressure (after bronchoconstrictor challenge, treated)−peak baseline pressure (treated)*100%/(peak pressure (after bronchoconstrictor challenge, water)−peak baseline pressure (water)). Inhibition curves are fitted using the four parameter logistic equation from GraphPad software. ID₅₀ (dose required to produce 50% inhibition of the bronchoconstrictor response) and Emax (maximal inhibition) are also estimated wherever appropriate.

The magnitude of bronchoprotection at different time-points after inhalation of the test compound is used to estimate the pharmacodynamic half-life (PD T_(1/2)). PD T_(1/2) is determined using a non-linear regression fit using a one-phase exponential decay equation (GraphPad Prism, Version 4.00): Y=Span*exp(−K*X)+Plateau; Starts at Span+Plateau and decays to Plateau with a rate constant K. The PD T_(1/2)=0.69/K. Plateau is constrained to 0.

Exemplified compounds of this invention are expected to produce a dose-dependent bronchoprotective effect against MCh-induced bronchoconstriction and His-induced bronchoconstriction. Generally, test compounds having an ID₅₀ less than about 300 μg/mL for MCh-induced bronchoconstriction and an ID₅₀ less than about 300 μg/mL for His-induced bronchoconstriction at 1.5 hours post-dose in this assay are preferred. Additionally, test compounds having a duration (PD T_(1/2)) of brochoprotective activity of at least about 24 hours in this assay are generally preferred.

Assay Test Procedure H Inhalation Guinea Pig Salivation Assay

Guinea pigs (Charles River, Wilmington, Mass.) weighing 200-350 g are acclimated to the in-house guinea pig colony for at least 3 days following arrival. Test compound or vehicle are dosed via inhalation (IH) over a 10 minute time period in a pie shaped dosing chamber (R+S Molds, San Carlos, Calif.). Test solutions are dissolved in sterile water and delivered using a nebulizer filled with 5.0 mL of dosing solution. Guinea pigs are restrained in the inhalation chamber for 30 minutes. During this time, guinea pigs are restricted to an area of approximately 110 sq. cm. This space is adequate for the animals to turn freely, reposition themselves, and allow for grooming. Following 20 minutes of acclimation, guinea pigs are exposed to an aerosol generated from a LS Star Nebulizer Set (Model 22F51, PARI Respiratory Equipment, Inc. Midlothian, Va.) driven by house air at a pressure of 22 psi. Upon completion of nebulization, guinea pigs are evaluated at 1.5, 6, 12, 24, 48, or 72 hrs after treatment.

Guinea pigs are anesthetized one hour before testing with an intramuscular (IM) injection of a mixture of ketamine 43.75 mg/kg, xylazine 3.5 mg/kg, and acepromazine 1.05 mg/kg at an 0.88 mL/kg volume. Animals are placed ventral side up on a heated (37° C.) blanket at a 20 degree incline with their head in a downward slope. A 4-ply 2×2 inch gauze pad (Nu-Gauze General-use sponges, Johnson and Johnson, Arlington, Tex.) is inserted in the guinea pig's mouth. Five minutes later, the muscarinic agonist pilocarpine (3.0 mg/kg, s.c.) is administered and the gauze pad is immediately discarded and replaced by a new pre-weighed gauze pad. Saliva is collected for 10 minutes, at which point the gauze pad is weighed and the difference in weight recorded to determine the amount of accumulated saliva (in mg). The mean amount of saliva collected for animals receiving the vehicle and each dose of test compound is calculated. The vehicle group mean is considered to be 100% salivation. Results are calculated using result means (n=3 or greater). Confidence intervals (95%) are calculated for each dose at each time point using two-way ANOVA. This model is a modified version of the procedure described in Rechter, “Estimation of anticholinergic drug effects in mice by antagonism against pilocarpine-induced salivation” Ata Pharmacol Toxicol, 1996, 24:243-254.

The mean weight of saliva in vehicle-treated animals, at each pre-treatment time, is calculated and used to compute % inhibition of salivation, at the corresponding pre-treatment time, at each dose. The inhibition dose-response data are fitted to a four parameter logistic equation using GraphPad Prism, version 3.00 for Windows (GraphPad Software, San Diego, Calif.) to estimate anti-sialagogue ID₅₀ (dose required to inhibit 50% of pilocarpine-evoked salivation). The equation used is as follows:

Y=Min+(Max−Min)/(1+10^(((log ID50-X)*Hillslope)))

where X is the logarithm of dose, Y is the response (% inhibition of salivation). Y starts at Min and approaches asymptotically to Max with a sigmoidal shape.

The ratio of the anti-sialagogue ID₅₀ to bronchoprotective ID₅₀ is used to compute the apparent lung-selectivity index of the test compound. Generally, compounds having an apparent lung-selectivity index greater than about 5 are preferred.

While the present invention has been described with reference to specific aspects or embodiments thereof, it will be understood by those of ordinary skilled in the art that various changes can be made or equivalents can be substituted without departing from the true spirit and scope of the invention. Additionally, to the extent permitted by applicable patent statutes and regulations, all publications, patents and patent applications cited herein are hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety to the same extent as if each document had been individually incorporated by reference herein. 

1-33. (canceled)
 34. A method for treating a pulmonary disorder, the method comprising administering to a patient in need of treatment a compound of formula I:

wherein W represents O or NR^(a); where W^(a) is hydrogen or (1-4C)alkyl; R¹ is (2-9C)heteroaryl containing from 1 to 4 heteroatoms independently selected from oxygen nitrogen and sulfur or (3-7C)cycloalkyl; wherein the heteroaryl or cycloalkyl group is unsubstituted or substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents independently selected from (1-4C)alkyl (2-4C)alkenyl (2-4C)alkynyl (3-6C)cycloalkyl (6-10C)aryl (2-9C)heteroaryl (3-5C)heterocyclic, cyano, halo, —OR^(1a), —C(O)OR^(1b), —S(O)R^(1c), —S(O))R^(1d)—O—R^(1e), —NR^(1f)R^(1g), —C(O)R^(1h), NR^(1i)C(O)OR^(1j), —OC(O)NR^(1k)R^(1l), —NR^(1m)C(O)R^(1n), —C(O)NR^(1o)R^(1p) and —NHS(O)₂R^(1q); where each of R^(1a), R^(1b), R^(1c), R^(1d), R^(1e), R^(1f), R^(1g), R^(1h), R^(1i), R^(1j), R^(1k), R^(1l), R^(1m), R^(1n), R^(1o), R^(1p), and R^(1q) is independently selected from hydrogen (1-4C)alkyl and phenyl-(1-4C)alkyl; and where each (3-6C)cycloalkyl (6-10C)aryl (2-9C)heteroaryl and (3-5C)heterocyclic group is unsubstituted or substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents selected from (1-4C)alkyl halo and —OR^(1a); and where each alkyl group present in R¹ is unsubstituted or substituted with from 1 to 3 fluoro substituents; each R² is independently selected from (1-4C)alkyl (2-4C)alkenyl (2-4C)alkynyl (3-6C)cycloalkyl cyano, halo, —OR^(2a), —C(O)OR^(2b), —SR^(2c), —S(O)R^(2d), —S(O)₂R^(2e)— and —NR^(2f)R^(2g); where each of R^(2a), R^(2b), R^(2c), R^(2d), R^(2e), R^(2f), and R^(2g) is independently selected from hydrogen (1-4C)alkyl and phenyl-(1-4C)alkyl; and where each alkyl group present in R² is unsubstituted or substituted with from 1 to 3 fluoro substituents; each R³ is independently selected from (1-4C)alkyl (2-4C)alkenyl (2-4C)alkynyl (3-6C)cycloalkyl cyano, halo, —OR^(3a), —C(O)OR^(3b), —SR^(3c), —S(O)R^(3d), —S(O)₂R^(3e) and —NR^(3f)R^(3g); or two R³ groups are joined to form (1-3C)alkylene, (2-3C)alkenylene or oxiran-2,3-diyl; where each of R^(3a), R^(3b), R^(3c), R^(3d), R^(3e), R^(3f) and R^(3g) is independently selected from hydrogen, (1-4C)alkyl and phenyl-(1-4C)alkyl; R⁴ represents a divalent hydrocarbon group containing from 4 to 28 carbon atoms and optionally containing from 1 to 10 heteroatoms selected independently from halo, oxygen nitrogen and sulfur provided that the number of contiguous atoms in the shortest chain between the two nitrogen atoms to which R⁴ is attached is in the range of from 4 to 16; R⁵ represents hydrogen or (1-4C)alkyl; R⁶ is —N(R^(6a))C(O)R^(6b) or —CR^(6c)R^(6d)OR^(6e) and R⁷ is hydrogen; or R⁶ and R⁷ together form —N(R^(7a))C(O)C(R^(7b))═C(R^(7c))—, —C(R^(7d))═C(R^(7e))C(O)N(R^(7f))—, —N(R^(7g))C(O)CR^(7h)R^(7i)—CR^(7j)R^(7k)— or —CR^(7l)R^(7m)—CR^(7n)R^(7o)C(O)—N(R^(7p))—; where each of R^(6a), R^(6b), R^(6c), R^(6d) and R^(6e) is independently selected from hydrogen and (1-4C)alkyl; and each of Ran R^(7a), R^(7b), R^(7c), R^(7d), R^(7e), R^(7f), R^(7g), R^(7h), R^(7i), R^(7j), R^(7k), R^(7l), R^(7m), R^(7n), R^(7o) and R^(7p) is independently selected from hydrogen and (1-4C)alkyl; each R^(8a) and R^(8b) is independently selected from hydrogen (1-4C)alkyl hydroxy and fluoro, or R^(8a) and R^(8b) together with the atoms to which they are attached form a (3-6C)cycloalkyl ring or a (2-5C)heterocyclic ring containing 1 or 2 heteroatoms independently selected from oxygen nitrogen and sulfur a is 0 or an integer of from 1 to 3; b is 0 or an integer of from 1 to 5; c is 0 or an integer of from 1 to 4; m is 0 or an integer of from 1 to 3; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate or stereoisomer thereof.
 35. A method of producing bronchodilation in a patient, the method comprising administering to a patient a bronchodilation-producing amount of a compound of claim 1 formula I:

wherein W represents O or NW^(a); where W^(a) is hydrogen or (1-4C)alkyl; R¹ is (2-9C)heteroaryl containing from 1 to 4 heteroatoms independently selected from oxygen nitrogen and sulfur or (3-7C)cycloalkyl; wherein the heteroaryl or cycloalkyl group is unsubstituted or substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents independently selected from (1-4C)alkyl (2-4C)alkenyl (2-4C)alkynyl (3-6C)cycloalkyl (6-10C)aryl (2-9C)heteroaryl (3-C(O)R^(1h), —NR^(1i)C(O)OR^(1j), —OC(O)NR^(1k)R^(1l), —NR^(1m)C(O)R^(1n), —C(O)NR^(1o)R^(1p) and —NHS(O)₂R^(1q); where each of R^(1a), R^(1b), R^(1c), R^(1d), R^(1e), R^(1f), R^(1g), R^(1h), R^(1i), R^(1j), R^(1k), R^(1l), R^(1m), R^(1n), R^(1o), R^(1p) and R^(1p) is independently selected from hydrogen (1-4C)alkyl and phenyl-(1-4C)alkyl; and where each (3-6C)cycloalkyl (6-10C)aryl (2-9C)heteroaryl and (3-5C)heterocyclic group is unsubstituted or substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents selected from (1-4C)alkyl halo and —OR^(1a); and where each alkyl group present in R¹ is unsubstituted or substituted with from 1 to 3 fluoro substituents; each R² is independently selected from (1-4C)alkyl (2-4C)alkenyl (2-4C)alkynyl (3-6C)cycloalkyl cyano, halo, —OR^(2a), —C(O)OR^(2b), —SR^(2c), —S(O)R^(2d), —S(O)₂R^(2e) and —NR^(2f)R^(2g); where each of R^(2a), R^(2b), R^(2c), R^(2d), R^(2e), R^(2f) and R^(2g) is independently selected from hydrogen (1-4C)alkyl and phenyl-(1-4C)alkyl; and where each alkyl group present in R² is unsubstituted or substituted with from 1 to 3 fluoro substituents; each R³ is independently selected from (1-4C)alkyl (2-4C)alkenyl (2-4C)alkynyl (3-6C)cycloalkyl cyano, halo, —OR^(3a), —C(O)OR^(3b), —SR^(3c), —S(O)R^(3d), —S(O)₂R^(3e) and —NR^(3f)R^(3g); or two R³ groups are joined to form (1-3C)alkylene, (2-3C)alkenylene or oxiran-2,3-diyl where each of R^(3a), R^(3b), R^(3c), R^(3d), R^(3e), R^(3f) and R^(3g) is independently selected from hydrogen, (1-4C)alkyl and phenyl-(1-4C)alkyl; R⁴ represents a divalent hydrocarbon group containing from 4 to 28 carbon atoms and optionally containing from 1 to 10 heteroatoms selected independently from halo, oxygen nitrogen and sulfur provided that the number of contiguous atoms in the shortest chain between the two nitrogen atoms to which R⁴ is attached is in the range of from 4 to 16; R⁵ represents hydrogen or (1-4C)alkyl; R⁶ is —N(R^(6a))C(O)R^(6b) or —CR^(6c)R^(6d)OR^(6e) and R⁷ is hydrogen; or R⁶ and R⁷ together form —N(R^(7a))C(O)C(R^(7b))═C(R^(7c))—, —C(R^(7d))═C(R^(7e))C(O)N(R^(7f))—, —N(R^(7g))C(O)CR^(7h)R^(7i)—CR^(7j)R^(7k)— or —CR^(7l)R^(7m)—CR^(7n)R^(7o)C(O)—N(R^(7p))—; where each of R^(6a), R^(6b), R^(6c), R^(6d) and R^(6c) is independently selected from hydrogen and (1-4C)alkyl; and each of R^(7a), R^(7b), R^(7c), R^(7d), R^(7e), R^(7f), R^(7g), R^(7h), R^(7i), R^(7j), R^(7k), R^(7l), R^(7m), R^(7n), R^(7o) and R^(7p) is independently selected from hydrogen and (1-4C)alkyl; each R^(8a) and R^(8b) is independently selected from hydrogen (1-4C)alkyl hydroxy and fluoro, or R^(8a) and R^(8b) together with the atoms to which they are attached form a (3-6C)cycloalkyl ring or a (2-5C)heterocyclic ring containing 1 or 2 heteroatoms independently selected from oxygen nitrogen and sulfur a is 0 or an integer of from 1 to 3; b is 0 or an integer of from 1 to 5; c is 0 or an integer of from 1 to 4; m is 0 or an integer of from 1 to 3; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate or stereoisomer thereof.
 36. A method of treating chronic obstructive pulmonary disease or asthma, the method comprising administering to a patient in need of treatment a compound of formula I:

wherein W represents O or NW^(a); where W^(a) is hydrogen or (1-4C)alkyl; R¹ is (2-9C)heteroaryl containing from 1 to 4 heteroatoms independently selected from oxygen nitrogen and sulfur or (3-7C)cycloalkyl; wherein the heteroaryl or cycloalkyl group is unsubstituted or substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents independently selected from (1-4C)alkyl (2-4C)alkenyl (2-4C)alkynyl (3-6C)cycloalkyl (6-10C)aryl (2-9C)heteroaryl (3-5C)heterocyclic, cyano, halo, —OR^(1a), —C(O)OR^(1b), —SR^(1c), —S(O)R^(1d), —S(O)₂R^(1e), —NR^(1f)R^(1g), —C(O)R_(1h), —NR^(1i)C(O)OR^(1j), —OC(O)NR^(1k)R^(1l), —NR^(1m)C(O)R^(1n), —C(O)NR^(1o)R^(1p) and —NHS(O)₂R^(1q); where each of R^(1a), R^(1b), R^(1c), R^(1d), R^(1e), R^(1f), R^(1g), R^(1h), R^(1i), R^(1j), R^(1k), R^(1l), R^(1m), R^(1n), R^(1o), R^(1p) and R^(1q) is independently selected from hydrogen (1-4C)alkyl and phenyl-(1-4C)alkyl; and where each (3-6C)cycloalkyl (6-10C)aryl (2-9C)heteroaryl and (3-5C)heterocyclic group is unsubstituted or substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents selected from (1-4C)alkyl halo and —OR^(1a); and where each alkyl group present in R¹ is unsubstituted or substituted with from 1 to 3 fluoro substituents; each R² is independently selected from (1-4C)alkyl (2-4C)alkenyl (2-4C)alkynyl (3-6C)cycloalkyl, cyano, halo, —OR^(2a), —C(O)OR^(2b), —SR^(2c), —S(O)R^(2d), —S(O)₂R^(2e) and —NR^(2f)R^(2g); where each of R^(2a), R^(2b), R^(2c), R^(2d), R^(2e), R^(2f) and R^(2g) is independently selected from hydrogen (1-4C)alkyl and phenyl-(1-4C)alkyl; and where each alkyl group present in R² is unsubstituted or substituted with from 1 to 3 fluoro substituents; each R³ is independently selected from (1-4C)alkyl (2-4C)alkenyl (2-4C)alkynyl (3-6C)cycloalkyl cyano, halo, —OR^(3a), —C(O)OR^(3b), SR^(3c), —S(O)R^(3d), —S(O)₂R^(3e) and —NR^(3f)R^(3g) or two R³ groups are joined to form (1-3C)alkylene, (2-3C)alkenylene or oxiran-2,3-diyl; where each of R^(3a), R^(3b), R^(3c), R^(3d), R^(3e), R^(3f) and R^(3g) is independently selected from hydrogen (1-4C)alkyl and phenyl-(1-4C)alkyl; R⁴ represents a divalent hydrocarbon group containing from 4 to 28 carbon atoms and optionally containing from 1 to 10 heteroatoms selected independently from halo, oxygen nitrogen and sulfur, provided that the number of contiguous atoms in the shortest chain between the two nitrogen atoms to which R⁴ is attached is in the range of from 4 to 16; R⁵ represents hydrogen or (1-4C)alkyl; R⁶ is —N(R^(6a))C(O)R^(6b) or —CR^(6c)R^(6d)OR^(6e) and R⁷ is hydrogen; or R⁶ and R⁷ together form —N(R^(7a))C(O)C(R^(7b))═C(R^(7c))—, —C(R^(7d))═C(R^(7e))C(O)N(R^(7f))—, —N(R^(7g))C(O)CR^(7h)R^(7i)—CR^(7j)R^(7k)— or —CR^(7l)R^(7m)—CR^(7n)R^(7o)C(O)—N(R^(7p))—; where each of R^(6a), R^(6b), R^(6c), R^(6d) and R^(6e) is independently selected from hydrogen and (1-4C)alkyl; and each of R^(7a), R^(7b), R^(7c), R^(7d), R^(7e), R^(7f), R^(7g), R^(7h), R^(7i), R^(7j), R^(7k), R^(7l), R^(7m), R^(7n), R^(7o), and R^(7p) is independently selected from hydrogen and (1-4C)alkyl; each R^(8a) and R^(8b) is independently selected from hydrogen (1-4C)alkyl hydroxy and fluoro, or R^(8a) and R^(8b) together with the atoms to which they are attached form a (3-6C)cycloalkyl ring or a (2-5C)heterocyclic ring containing 1 or 2 heteroatoms independently selected from oxygen nitrogen and sulfur a is 0 or an integer of from 1 to 3; b is 0 or an integer of from 1 to 5; c is 0 or an integer of from 1 to 4; m is 0 or an integer of from 1 to 3; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate or stereoisomer thereof. 37-41. (canceled)
 42. The method of claim 35 or 36, wherein R¹ is an unsubstituted or substituted heteroaryl group selected from a pyrrole, imidazole, thiazole, oxazole, furan, thiophene, triazole, pyrazole, isoxazole, isothiazole, pyridine, pyridine N-oxide, pyrazine, pyridazine, pyrimidine, triazine, indole, benzofuran, benzothiophene, benzimidazole, benzthiazole, quinoline, isoquinoline, quinazoline and quinoxaline ring, where the point of attachment is at any available carbon or nitrogen ring atom.
 43. The method of claim 35 or 36, wherein R¹ is an unsubstituted or substituted thienyl group.
 44. The method of claim 35 or 36, wherein R¹ is an unsubstituted or substituted thiazole group.
 45. The method of claim 35 or 36, wherein R¹ is an unsubstituted or substituted pyridyl or pyridyl N-oxide group.
 46. The method of claim 35 or 36, wherein R¹ is an unsubstituted or substituted furyl group.
 47. The method of claim 35 or 36, wherein W is O.
 48. The method of claim 35 or 36, wherein b is
 0. 49. The method of claim 35 or 36, wherein b is 1, and R^(8a) and R^(8b) are hydrogen.
 50. The method of claim 35 or 36, wherein m is
 2. 51. The method of claim 35 or 36, wherein R⁶ is —NHCHO or —CH₂OH and R⁷ is hydrogen; or R⁶ and R⁷ together form —NHC(O)CH═CH—, —CH═CHC(O)NH—, —CH₂CH₂C(O)NH— or —NHC(O)CH₂CH₂—.
 52. The method of claim 35 or 36, wherein R⁶ and R⁷ together form —NHC(O)CH═CH—.
 53. The method of claim 35 or 36, wherein the number of contiguous atoms in the shortest chain between the two nitrogen atoms to which R⁴ is attached is in the range of from 8 to
 14. 54. The method of claim 35 or 36, wherein the number of contiguous atoms in the shortest chain between the two nitrogen atoms to which R⁴ is attached is 8, 9, 10 or
 11. 55. The method of claim 35 or 36, wherein R⁴ is a divalent group of the formula: —(R^(4a))_(d)-(A¹)_(e)-(R^(4b))_(f)-Q—(R^(4c))_(g)-(A²)_(h)-(R^(4d))_(i)— wherein d, e, f, g, h and i are each independently selected from 0 and 1; R^(4a), R^(4b), R^(4c) and R^(4d) are each independently selected from (1-10C)alkylene, (2-10C)alkenylene and (2-10C)alkynylene, wherein each alkylene, alkenylene or alkynylene group is unsubstituted or substituted with from 1 to 5 substituents independently selected from (1-4C)alkyl, fluoro, hydroxy, phenyl and phenyl-(1-4C)alkyl; or R^(4d) represents (1-6C)alkylene-NHC(O)-(1-6C)alkylene; A¹ and A² are each independently selected from (3-7C)cycloalkylene, (6-10C)arylene, —O-(6-10C)arylene, (6-10C)arylene-O—, (2-9C)heteroarylene, —O-(2-9C)heteroarylene, (2-9C)heteroarylene-O— and (3-6C)heterocyclene, wherein each cycloalkylene is unsubstituted or substituted with from 1 to 4 substituents selected independently from (1-4C)alkyl, and each arylene, heteroarylene or heterocyclene group is unsubstituted or substituted with from 1 to 4 substituents independently selected from halo, (1-4C)alkyl, (1-4C)alkoxy, —S-(1-4C)alkyl, —S(O)-(1-4C)alkyl, —S(O)₂-(1-4C)alkyl, —C(O)O(1-4C)alkyl, carboxy, cyano, hydroxy, nitro, trifluoromethyl and trifluoromethoxy; Q is selected from a bond, —O—, —C(O)O—, —OC(O)—, —S—, —S(O)—, —S(O)₂—, —N(Q^(a))C(O)—, —C(O)N(Q^(b))-, —N(Q^(c))S(O)₂—, —S(O)₂N(Q^(d))-, N(Q^(e))C(O)N(Q^(f))-, —N(Q^(g))S(O)₂N(Q^(h))-, —OC(O)N(Q^(i))-, —N(Q^(j))C(O)O— and —N(Q^(k)); where Q^(a), Q^(b), Q^(c), Q^(d), Q^(e), Q^(f), Q^(g), Q^(h), Q^(i), Q^(i) and Q^(k) are each independently selected from hydrogen, (1-6C)alkyl, A³ and (1-4C)alkylene-A⁴, wherein the alkyl group is unsubstituted or substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents independently selected from fluoro, hydroxy and (1-4C)alkoxy; or together with the nitrogen atom and the group R^(4b) or R^(4c) to which they are attached, form a 4 to 6 membered azacycloalkylene group; and A³ and A⁴ are each independently selected from (3-6C)cycloalkyl, (6-10C)aryl, (2-9C)heteroaryl and (3-6C)heterocyclyl, wherein each cycloalkyl is unsubstituted or substituted with from 1 to 4 substituents selected independently from (1-4C)alkyl and each aryl, heteroaryl or heterocyclyl group is unsubstituted or substituted with from 1 to 4 substituents independently selected from halo, (1-4C)alkyl and (1-4C)alkoxy.
 56. The method of claim 55, wherein R⁴ is a divalent group of the formula: —(R^(4a))_(d)— where R^(4a) is (4-10C)alkylene.
 57. The method of claim 56, wherein R⁴ is —(CH₂)₈—, —(CH₂)₉— or —(CH₂)₁₀—.
 58. The method of claim 55, wherein R⁴ is a divalent group of the formula: —(R^(4a))_(d)-(A²)_(h)-(R^(4d))_(i)— wherein R^(4a) is (1-10C)alkylene; A² is (6-10C)arylene or (2-9C)heteroarylene; and R^(4d) is (1-10C)alkylene.
 59. The method of claim 55, wherein R⁴ is a divalent group of the formula: —(R^(4a))_(d)-Q-(A²)_(h)-(R^(4d))_(i)— wherein Q is —O— or —N(Q^(k))-; Q^(k) is hydrogen or (1-3C)alkyl; R^(4a) is (1-10C)alkylene; A² is (6-10C)arylene or (2-9C)heteroarylene; and R^(4d) is (1-10C)alkylene.
 60. The method of claim 55, wherein Q is —N(Q^(a))C(O)— or —C(O)N(Q^(b))-.
 61. The method of claim 60, wherein R⁴ is selected from:

where za is an integer from 2 to 10; and zb is an integer from 2 to 10; provided that za+zb is an integer from 4 to 12;

where zc is an integer from 2 to 7; and zd is an integer from 1 to 6; provided that zc+zd is an integer from 3 to 8; and wherein the phen-1,4-ylene group is unsubstituted or substituted with from 1 to 4 substituents independently selected from halo, (1-4C)alkyl, (1-4C)alkoxy, —S-(1-4C)alkyl, —S(O)-(1-4C)alkyl, —S(O)₂-(1-4C)alkyl, —C(O)O(1-4C)alkyl, carboxy, cyano, hydroxy, nitro, trifluoromethyl and trifluoromethoxy;

where ze is an integer from 2 to 6; zf is an integer from 1 to 5; and zg is an integer from 1 to 5; provided that ze+zf+zg is an integer from 4 to 8; and wherein the phen-1,4-ylene group is unsubstituted or substituted with from 1 to 4 substituents independently selected from halo, (1-4C)alkyl, (1-4C)alkoxy, —S-(1-4C)alkyl, —S(O)-(1-4C)alkyl, —S(O)₂-(1-4C)alkyl, —C(O)O(1-4C)alkyl, carboxy, cyano, hydroxy, nitro, trifluoromethyl and trifluoromethoxy;

where zh is an integer from 2 to 10; and zi is an integer from 2 to 10; provided that zh+zi is an integer from 4 to 12;

where zj is an integer from 2 to 7; and zk is an integer from 1 to 6; provided that zj+zk is an integer from 3 to 8; and wherein the phen-1,4-ylene group is unsubstituted or substituted with from 1 to 4 substituents independently selected from halo, (1-4C)alkyl, (1-4C)alkoxy, —S-(1-4C)alkyl, —S(O)-(1-4C)alkyl, —S(O)₂-(1-4C)alkyl, —C(O)O(1-4C)alkyl, carboxy, cyano, hydroxy, nitro, trifluoromethyl and trifluoromethoxy; and

where zl is an integer from 2 to 6; zm is an integer from 1 to 5; and zn is an integer from 1 to 5; provided that zl+zm+zn is an integer from 4 to 8; and wherein the phen-1,4-ylene group is unsubstituted or substituted with from 1 to 4 substituents independently selected from halo, (1-4C)alkyl, (1-4C)alkoxy, —S-(1-4C)alkyl, —S(O)-(1-4C)alkyl, —S(O)₂-(1-4C)alkyl, —C(O)O(1-4C)alkyl, carboxy, cyano, hydroxy, nitro, trifluoromethyl and trifluoromethoxy.
 62. The method of claim 35 or 36, wherein R⁴ is selected from: —(CH₂)₇—; —(CH₂)₈—; —(CH₂)₉—; —(CH₂)₁₀—; —(CH₂)₁₁—; —(CH₂)₂C(O)NH(CH₂)₅—; —(CH₂)₂N(CH₃)C(O)(CH₂)₅—; —(CH₂)₂C(O)NH(phen-1,4-ylene)CH₂—; —(CH₂)₂NHC(O)(phen-1,4-ylene)CH₂—; —(CH₂)₂NHC(O)NH(CH₂)₅—; —(CH₂)₃NHC(O)NH(CH₂)₅—; —(CH₂)₂C(O)NHCH₂(cyclohex-1,3-ylene)CH₂—; —(CH₂)₂NHC(O)(cyclopent-1,3-ylene)-; —(CH₂)₂NHC(O)NH(phen-1,4-ylene)(CH₂)₂—; 1-[—(CH₂)₂C(O)](piperidin-4-yl)(CH₂)₂—; —(CH₂)₂NHC(O)(trans-cyclohex-1,4-ylene)CH₂—; —(CH₂)₂NHC(O)(cis-cyclopent-1,3-ylene)-; —(CH₂)₂NH(phen-1,4-ylene)(CH₂)₂—; 1-[—(CH₂)₂NHC(O)](piperidin-4-yl)(CH₂)₂—; —CH₂(phen-1,4-ylene)NH(phen-1,4-ylene)CH₂—; —(CH₂)₂C(O)NHCH₂(phen-1,3-ylene)CH₂—; —(CH₂)₂C(O)NHCH₂(pyrid-2,6-ylene)CH₂—; —(CH₂)₂C(O)NH(cis-cyclohex-1,4-ylene)CH₂—; —(CH₂)₂C(O)NH(trans-cyclohex-1,4-ylene)CH₂—; —(CH₂)₂NHC(O)(cis-cyclopent-1,3-ylene)CH₂—; —(CH₂)₂N(CH₃)C(O)(phen-1,3-ylene)CH₂—; —(CH₂)₂N(CH₃)C(O)(trans-cyclohex-1,4-ylene)CH₂—; —(CH₂)₂C(O)NH(phen-1,4-ylene)C*H(CH₃)— ((S)-isomer); —(CH₂)₂C(O)NH(phen-1,4-ylene)C*H(CH₃)— ((R)-isomer); 2-[(S)-(—CH₂—](pyrrolidin-1-yl)C(O)(CH₂)₄—; 2-[(S)-(—CH₂—](pyrrolidin-1-yl)C(O)(phen-1,4-ylene)CH₂—; —(CH₂)₂C(O)NH(4-chlorophen-1,3-ylene)CH₂—; —CH₂(2-fluorophen-1,3-ylene)CH₂—; —(CH₂)₂C(O)NH(4-methylphen-1,3-ylene)CH₂—; —(CH₂)₂C(O)NH(6-chlorophen-1,3-ylene)CH₂—; —(CH₂)₂C(O)NH(2-chlorophen-1,4-ylene)CH₂—; —(CH₂)₂C(O)NH(2,6-dichlorophen-1,4-ylene)CH₂—; —(CH₂)₂NHC(O)NHCH₂(phen-1,3-ylene)CH₂—; 4-[—CH₂—](piperidin-1-yl)C(O)(phen-1,4-ylene)CH₂—; —(CH₂)₂C(O)N(CH₂CH₃)(phen-1,4-ylene)CH₂—; 1-[—(CH₂)₂NHC(O)](piperidin-4-yl)-; —(CH₂)₂C(O)NH(phen-1,4-ylene)(CH₂)₂—; —(CH₂)₂NHC(O)(thien-2,5-ylene)CH₂—; —(CH₂)₂N(CH₃)C(O)(3-nitrophen-1,4-ylene)CH₂—; —(CH₂)₂N(CH₃)C(O)(trans-cyclohex-1,4-ylene)-; 1-[—CH₂(2-fluorophen-1,3-ylene)CH₂](piperidin-4-yl)-; 5-[—(CH₂)₂NHC(O)](pyrid-2-yl)CH₂—; —(CH₂)₂(phen-1,4-ylene)(CH₂)₂—; —(CH₂)₃(thien-2,5-ylene)(CH₂)₃—; —(CH₂)₂(phen-1,4-ylene)NH(phen-1,4-ylene)(CH₂)₂—; —CH₂(phen-1,2-ylene)NH(phen-1,4-ylene)(CH₂)₂—; 1-[—CH₂(2-fluorophen-1,3-ylene)CH₂](piperidin-4-yl)(CH₂)₂—; 1-[—CH₂(2-fluorophen-1,3-ylene)CH₂](piperidin-4-yl)CH₂—; —(CH₂)₂C(O)NH(3-chlorophen-1,4-ylene)CH₂—; —(CH₂)₂C(O)NH(2-(CF₃O—)phen-1,4-ylene)CH₂—; —(CH₂)₃(phen-1,3-ylene)NH(phen-1,4-ylene)(CH₂)₂—; —(CH₂)₂S(O)₂NH(CH₂)₅—; —CH₂(phen-1,3-ylene)NH(phen-1,4-ylene)(CH₂)₂—; —(CH₂)₂C(O)NH(2-iodophen-1,4-ylene)CH₂—; —(CH₂)₂C(O)NH(2-chloro-5-methoxyphen-1,4-ylene)CH₂—; —(CH₂)₂C(O)NH(2-chloro-6-methylphen-1,4-ylene)CH₂—; —(CH₂)₂N(CH₃)S(O)₂(phen-1,4-ylene)CH₂—; —(CH₂)₂C(O)NH(2-bromophen-1,4-ylene)CH₂—; —(CH₂)₃(phen-1,4-ylene)NH(phen-1,4-ylene)(CH₂)₂—; —(CH₂)₃(phen-1,2-ylene)NH(phen-1,4-ylene)(CH₂)₂—; 1-[—CH₂(2-fluorophen-1,3-ylene)CH₂](piperidin-4-yl)(CH₂)₃—; —(CH₂)₂C(O)NH(2-methoxyphen-1,4-ylene)CH₂—; —(CH₂)₅NH(phen-1,4-ylene)(CH₂)₂—; 4-[—(CH₂)₂—](piperidin-1-yl)(phen-1,4-ylene)(CH₂)₂—; —(CH₂)₂C(O)NH(phen-1,4-ylene)CH(CH₃)CH₂—; —(CH₂)-2-(trans-cyclohex-1,4-ylene)NH(phen-1,4-ylene)(CH₂)₂—; —(CH₂)₂C(O)NH(2-fluorophen-1,4-ylene)CH₂—; —(CH₂)₂(phen-1,3-ylene)NH(phen-1,4-ylene)(CH₂)₂—; —(CH₂)₂C(O)NH(2,5-difluorophen-1,4-ylene)CH₂—; —(CH₂)₂NHC(O)(phen-1,4-ylene)(CH₂)₂—; 1-[—CH₂(pyrid-2,6-ylene)CH₂](piperidin-4-yl)CH₂—; —(CH₂)₃NH(phen-1,4-ylene)(CH₂)₂—; —(CH₂)₂NH(naphth-1,4-ylene)(CH₂)₂—; —(CH₂)₃O(phen-1,4-ylene)CH₂—; 1-[—(CH₂)₃](piperidin-4-yl)CH₂—; 4-[—(CH₂)₂](piperidin-1-yl)C(O)(phen-1,4-ylene)CH₂—; —(CH₂)₃(phen-1,4-ylene)NHC(O)(CH₂)₂—; —(CH₂)₃O(phen-1,4-ylene)(CH₂)₂—; 2-[—(CH₂)₂](benzimidazol-5-yl)CH₂—; —(CH₂)₂-(trans-cyclohex-1,4-ylene)NHC(O)(CH₂)₂—; —(CH₂)₂-(trans-cyclohex-1,4-ylene)NHC(O)(CH₂)₄—; —(CH₂)₂-(trans-cyclohex-1,4-ylene)NHC(O)(CH₂)₅—; 4-[—(CH₂)₂](piperidin-1-yl)C(O)(CH₂)₂—; —(CH₂)₂NHC(O)NH(phen-1,4-ylene)CH₂—; —(CH₂)₂N(CH₃)(CH₂)₂(cis-cyclohex-1,4-ylene)-; —(CH₂)₂C(O)NH(2,3,5,6-tetrafluorophen-1,4-ylene)CH₂—; —(CH₂)₂C(O)NH(2,6-diiodophen-1,4-ylene)CH₂—; 4-[—(CH₂)₂](piperidin-1-yl)C(O)(CH₂)₃—; 4-[—(CH₂)₂](piperidin-1-yl)C(O)(CH₂)₄—; 4-[—(CH₂)₂](piperidin-1-yl)C(O)(CH₂)₅—; —(CH₂)₂C(O)NHCH₂(phen-1,4-ylene)CH₂—; —(CH₂)₂NHC(O)NHCH₂(phen-1,4-ylene)CH₂—; —(CH₂)₂C(O)NH(2-methylphen-1,4-ylene)CH₂—; 1-[—(CH₂)₃O(phen-1,4-ylene)(CH₂)₂](piperidin-4-yl)CH₂—; —(CH₂)₂C(O)NHCH₂(phen-1,3-ylene)(CH₂)₂—; —(CH₂)₂O(phen-1,3-ylene)CH₂—; —(CH₂)₂N(CH₃)C(O)CH₂O(phen-1,4-ylene)CH₂—; —(CH₂)₂N(CH₃)C(O)CH₂O(phen-1,3-ylene)CH₂—; —(CH₂)₂N(CH₃)C(O)(fur-2,5-ylene)CH₂—; —(CH₂)₂N(CH₃)C(O)(thien-2,5-ylene)CH₂—; —(CH₂)₂O(phen-1,4-ylene)O(CH₂)₂—; —(CH₂)₂(trans-cyclohex-1,4-ylene)NHC(O)(phen-1,4-ylene)CH₂—; —(CH₂)₂(trans-cyclohex-1,4-ylene)NHC(O)CH₂O(phen-1,2-ylene)CH₂—; (CH₂)₂(trans-cyclohex-1,4-ylene)NHC(O)CH₂O(phen-1,3-ylene)CH₂—; —(CH₂)₂(trans-cyclohex-1,4-ylene)NHC(O)CH₂O(phen-1,4-ylene)CH₂—; —(CH₂)₂(trans-cyclohex-1,4-ylene)NHC(O)(fur-2,5-ylene)CH₂—; —(CH₂)₂(trans-cyclohex-1,4-ylene)NHC(O)(thien-2,5-ylene)CH₂—; 4-[—(CH₂)₂](piperidin-1-yl)C(O)CH₂O(phen-1,2-ylene)CH₂—; 4-[—(CH₂)₂](piperidin-1-yl)C(O)CH₂O(phen-1,3-ylene)CH₂—; 4-[—(CH₂)₂](piperidin-1-yl)C(O)CH₂O(phen-1,4-ylene)CH₂—; 4-[—(CH₂)₂](piperidin-1-yl)C(O)(fur-2,5-ylene)CH₂—; 4-[—(CH₂)₂](piperidin-1-yl)C(O)(thien-2,5-ylene)CH₂—; —(CH₂)₂(phen-1,4-ylene)NHC(O)(phen-1,3-ylene)CH₂—; —(CH₂)₂(phen-1,4-ylene)NHC(O)(phen-1,4-ylene)CH₂—; —(CH₂)₂(phen-1,4-ylene)NHC(O)CH₂O(phen-1,2-ylene)CH₂—; —(CH₂)₂(phen-1,4-ylene)NHC(O)CH₂O(phen-1,3-ylene)CH₂—; —(CH₂)₂(phen-1,4-ylene)NHC(O)CH₂O(phen-1,4-ylene)CH₂—; —(CH₂)₂(phen-1,4-ylene)NHC(O)(fur-2,5-ylene)CH₂—; —(CH₂)₂(phen-1,4-ylene)NHC(O)(thien-2,5-ylene)CH₂—; —(CH₂)₂(trans-cyclohex-1,4-ylene)NHC(O)(phen-1,3-ylene)CH₂—; —(CH₂)₃O(phen-1,3-ylene)CH₂—; —CH₂CH(OH)CH₂NH(phen-1,4-ylene)(CH₂)₂—; —(CH₂)₄NH(phen-1,4-ylene)(CH₂)₂—; —(CH₂)₂C(O)NH(phen-1,4-ylene)CH₂NHC(O)CH₂—; —(CH₂)₂C(O)NH(phen-1,4-ylene)(CH₂)₂NHC(O)CH₂—; —(CH₂)₂C(O)NHCH₂(trans-cyclohex-1,4-ylene)CH₂—; —(CH₂)₂NHC(O)(CH₂)₅—; —(CH₂)₂O(phen-1,3-ylene)O(CH₂)₂—; —(CH₂)₂O(phen-1,2-ylene)O(CH₂)₂—; —CH₂(phen-1,2-ylene)O(phen-1,2-ylene)CH₂—; —(CH₂)₂C(O)NH(CH₂)₆—; —(CH₂)₃(phen-1,4-ylene)(CH₂)₃—; (CH₂)₃(phen-1,4-ylene)(CH₂)₂—; —(CH₂)₄(phen-1,4-ylene)(CH₂)₂—; —(CH₂)₃(furan-2,5-ylene)(CH₂)₃—; —(CH₂)₂N(CH₃)C(O)NH(phen-1,4-ylene)(CH₂)₂—; 4-[—(CH₂)₂](piperidin-1-yl)C(O)NH(phen-1,4-ylene)(CH₂)₂—; —(CH₂)₃(phen-1,3-ylene)(CH₂)₃—; —(CH₂)₃(tetrahydrofuran-2,5-ylene)(CH₂)₃—; and —(CH₂)₂O(phen-1,4-ylene)C(O)(CH₂)₂—.
 63. The method of claim 35 or 36, wherein the compound is a compound of formula II:

or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate or stereoisomer thereof.
 64. The method of claim 35 or 36, wherein the compound is a compound of formula III:

or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate or stereoisomer thereof.
 65. The method of claim 35 or 36, wherein the compound is a compound of formula IV:

or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate or stereoisomer thereof.
 66. The method of claim 35 or 36, wherein the compound is a compound of formula V:

wherein each R⁹ is independently selected from (1-4C)alkyl, (2-4C)alkenyl, (2-4C)alkynyl, (3-6C)cycloalkyl, cyano, halo, —OR^(9a), —C(O)OR^(9b), —SR^(9c), —S(O)R^(9d), —S(O)₂R^(9e) and —NR^(9f)R^(9g); wherein R^(9a), R^(9b), R^(9c), R^(9d), R^(9e), R^(9f) and R^(9g) are independently selected from hydrogen, (1-4C)alkyl and phenyl-(1-4C)alkyl; and n is 0, 1, 2 or 3; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate or stereoisomer thereof.
 67. The method of claim 35 or 36, wherein the compound is a compound of formula VI:

wherein each R¹⁰ is independently selected from (1-4C)alkyl, (2-4C)alkenyl, (2-4C)alkynyl, (3-6C)cycloalkyl, cyano, halo, —OR^(10a), —C(O)OR^(10b), —SR^(10c), —S(O)R^(10d), —S(O)₂R^(10e) and —NR^(10f)R^(10g) herein R^(10a), R^(10b), R^(10c), R^(10d), R^(10e), R^(10f) and R^(10g) are independently selected from hydrogen, (1-4C)alkyl and phenyl-(1-4C)alkyl; and o is 0, 1, 2 or 3; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate or stereoisomer thereof.
 68. The method of claim 35 or 36, wherein the compound is a compound of formula VII:

wherein each R¹¹ is independently selected from (1-4C)alkyl, (2-4C)alkenyl, (2-4C)alkynyl, (3-6C)cycloalkyl, cyano, halo, —OR^(11a), —C(O)OR^(11b), —SR^(11c), —S(O)R^(11d), —S(O)₂R^(11e) and —NR^(11f)R^(11g) wherein R^(11a), R^(11b), R^(11c), R^(11d), R^(11e), R^(11f) and R^(11g) are independently selected from hydrogen, (1-4C)alkyl and phenyl-(1-4C)alkyl; and p is 0, 1 or 2; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate or stereoisomer thereof.
 69. The method of claim 35 or 36, wherein the compound is a compound of formula VIII:

or the corresponding pyridine N-oxide; wherein each R¹² is independently selected from (1-4C)alkyl, (2-4C)alkenyl, (2-4C)alkynyl, (3-6C)cycloalkyl, cyano, halo, —OR^(12a), —C(O)OR^(12b), —SR^(12c), —S(O)R^(12d), —S(O)₂R^(12e) and —NR^(12f)R^(12g); wherein R^(12a), R^(12b), R^(12c), R^(12d), R^(12e), R^(12f) and R^(12g) are independently selected from hydrogen, (1-4C)alkyl and phenyl-(1-4C)alkyl; and q is 0, 1 or 2; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate or stereoisomer thereof.
 70. The method of claim 35 or 36, wherein the compound is selected from: (2-thien-2-ylphenyl)carbamic acid 1-{9-[(R)-2-hydroxy-2-(8-hydroxy-2-oxo-1,2-dihydroquinolin-5-yl)ethylamino]nonyl}piperidin-4-yl ester; (2-thien-3-ylphenyl)carbamic acid 1-{9-[(R)-2-hydroxy-2-(8-hydroxy-2-oxo-1,2-dihydroquinolin-5-yl)ethylamino]nonyl}piperidin-4-yl ester; (2,4-difluoro-6-pyridin-3-ylphenyl)carbamic acid 1-{9-[(R)-2-hydroxy-2-(8-hydroxy-2-oxo-1,2-dihydroquinolin-5-yl)ethylamino]nonyl}piperidin-4-yl ester; (2-thien-3-ylphenyl)carbamic acid 1-[2-(4-{[(R)-2-hydroxy-2-(8-hydroxy-2-oxo-1,2-dihydroquinolin-5-yl)ethylamino]methyl}benzoylamino)ethyl]piperidin-4-yl ester; (2-thien-3-ylphenyl)carbamic acid 1-[4-(4-{2-[(R)-2-hydroxy-2-(8-hydroxy-2-oxo-1,2-dihydroquinolin-5-yl)ethylamino]ethyl}phenyl)butyl]piperidin-4-yl ester; (2-thien-3-ylphenyl)carbamic acid 1-[2-(2-chloro-4-{[(R)-2-hydroxy-2-(8-hydroxy-2-oxo-1,2-dihydroquinolin-5-yl)ethylamino]methyl}-5-methoxyphenylcarbamoyl)-ethyl]piperidin-4-yl ester; [2-(4-methyl-1,3-thiazol-2-yl)phenyl]carbamic acid 1-{9-[(R)-2-hydroxy-2-(8-hydroxy-2-oxo-1,2-dihydroquinolin-5-yl)ethylamino]nonyl}piperidin-4-ylmethyl ester; (2-thiophen-3-ylphenyl)carbamic acid 1-[2-(4-{[(R)-2-hydroxy-2-(8-hydroxy-2-oxo-1,2-dihydroquinolin-5-yl)ethylamino]methyl}-3-methoxyphenylcarbamoyl)ethyl]-piperidin-4-yl ester; (2-thiazol-2-ylphenyl)carbamic acid 1-[2-(4-{[(R)-2-hydroxy-2-(8-hydroxy-2-oxo-1,2-dihydroquinolin-5-yl)ethylamino]methyl}-3-methoxyphenylcarbamoyl)ethyl]-piperidin-4-yl ester; [2-(4-bromothiazol-2-yl)phenyl]carbamic acid 1-[2-(4-{[(R)-2-hydroxy-2-(8-hydroxy-2-oxo-1,2-dihydroquinolin-5-yl)ethylamino]methyl}-3-methoxyphenylcarbamoyl)ethyl]piperidin-4-yl ester; [2-(4-methylthiazol-2-yl)phenyl]carbamic acid 1-[2-(4-{[(R)-2-hydroxy-2-(8-hydroxy-2-oxo-1,2-dihydroquinolin-5-yl)ethylamino]methyl}phenylcarbamoyl)ethyl]-piperidin-4-yl ester; (2-cyclohexylphenyl)carbamic acid 1-{9-[(R)-2-hydroxy-2-(8-hydroxy-2-oxo-1,2-dihydroquinolin-5-yl)ethylamino]nonyl}piperidin-4-yl ester; and (2-thiophen-2-ylphenyl)carbamic acid 1-[2-(4-{4-[(R)-2-hydroxy-2-(8-hydroxy-2-oxo-1,2-dihydroquinolin-5-yl)ethylamino]butyl}phenyl)ethyl]piperidin-4-yl ester. 